JP2020130800A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine such as a pinball game machine (Pachinko machine) and a reel type game machine (slot machine), being characterized in display means.SOLUTION: A pattern variable display on a first special pattern display unit and a pattern variable display on a second special pattern display unit may be simultaneously performed. In a normal game state, according to the pattern variable display on the first special pattern display unit, a decorative pattern variable display is displayed on a decorative pattern display unit 208. When a small winning game in which, in a period since start of the pattern variable display on the first special pattern display unit until stop display occurs, a small winning is generated by a special pattern g on the second special pattern display unit, and a second variable winning hole is opened/closed occurs, a stalling read head notice performance may be executed in a period whose length corresponds to an interruption period since passing of an original pattern variation time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, such amusement machines are known to be equipped with a notice means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the advance notice means.

In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature as a notice means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means that can display decorative pattern variation display,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
The fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, and
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the second symbol according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases where it becomes a state (hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period").
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the notice means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a figure explaining the structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) is a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram for determining the special figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation, and (b) shows that the special figure 2 is a small hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation when it becomes. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device in the normal game state, and (b) describes an example of the operation in each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st setting suggestion effect execution processing. It is a flowchart explaining the advance notice production determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the continuous notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (c). Is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first normal jackpot re-lottery, and FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first probability variation jackpot re-lottery. It is a figure explaining the content of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table, (a) is the figure which shows an example of the content of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4, and (b) is the setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 5, and (c) is the figure which shows an example of the content of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 6. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hit game in the normal game state, and (b) is the small in the normal game state. It is a timing chart explaining an example of operation in each symbol display device at the time of hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in a big hit game centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in a probabilistic game state centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery production centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect in a big hit game state centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice production centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect in a decorative symbol variation display centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect in a decorative symbol variation display centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a pause effect centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead notice effect centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production about the display of the total number of prize balls which won by the decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production about the display of the total number of prize balls which won by the decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine, (b) shows the mobile phone which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention, (c ) Indicates a portable game machine provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) is a home video game provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. The machine is shown, and (e) shows a data server that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that instructs the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend the ball, and the card unit that instructs the card unit to return the balance of the player. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that collides the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening opened upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 5), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 5) for performing control processing related to launching a game ball. A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 5), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 12A, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other and a one-digit seven-segment LED modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the back side or the rear side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be called the non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124, and as shown in FIG. 3B, a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are placed on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, 2nd special symbol display device 214, normal symbol holding lamp 216, 1st special symbol holding lamp 218, 2nd special symbol holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding special figure changing games, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure changing games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. The electric support medium lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of a normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 231a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

A predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226a, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, 231 and a jackpot generation gate 252 are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided at appropriate locations in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls. It is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, different ball detection sensors may be used to detect the winning balls, or the general winning openings may be entered in each of the plurality of general winning openings. The ball passages that guide the ball game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning opening 226, the balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they are entered, a predetermined number of prizes (for example, one) are awarded. In addition to paying out the balls, the entered game balls may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, two starting ports 230 and 231 of the first special figure are arranged vertically side by side in the lower center of the game board 200. In the following description, for convenience, the first special figure starting port 230 provided above is referred to as the "first special figure starting port (upper) 230", and the first special figure starting port 231 provided below is referred to. It may be referred to as "first special figure start port (bottom) 231". When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the starting port (upper) 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port (upper) 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure start port (upper) 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure start port (upper) 230 when hitting to the right. ing. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure performs the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

The first special figure start port (bottom) 231 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port (top) 230, and has a blade member 231a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade member 231a is closed, it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, and when the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 231a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined time. It opens and closes as many times as. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port (bottom) 231 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start port 228 when hitting left. .. Therefore, during left-handed striking, in principle, the player does not win the variable game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 231a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 231a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, while hitting left, there is almost no possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231. However, while hitting right, there is a possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231. It can be said that there is.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

The variable winning device 2340 is composed of, for example, a flat plate, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined interval. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and the first door member 2341a can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slightly downwardly inclined toward the front and is inclined from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in the state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is closed and the first of the game balls. When the entry to the rolling region SP1 is blocked and the state is retracted backward (open state), the first rolling region SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling region SP1. Entry is allowed. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i are projected rearward at substantially equal intervals so as to face the shutter member 2351a on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is increased. In the present embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). It may be possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, the shutter member 2351a is difficult for the player to see.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and the number based on the winning (for example, 15). ) To pay out the prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, so that various playability is provided. You may be able to.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided by the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the prize count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the discharge ball detection switch SW3 can be used to insert the game ball into the second variable winning opening 235a. By monitoring outs, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called deca ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the second special drawing starting port 232. In this case, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126, and the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the second special figure starting port 232, when the ball is hit to the left, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second special figure starting port 232, but it is hit to the right. In that case, it is possible to enter the ball with high frequency due to the arrangement of the surrounding nails. In addition. The second special figure starting port 232 may be provided on the downstream side of the second variable winning opening 235a.

Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning port or starting port is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226a, first variable winning opening 234a, second). Variable winning opening 235a) or starting port (1st special drawing starting port (top) 230, 1st special drawing starting port (bottom) 231, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), whichever winning opening or starting The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize in the mouth or only by passing through the starting port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning ports) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a make it difficult for the game ball to enter in the closed state, but it may be possible to win a prize, at least in the open state. It suffices if it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, To control the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) A drive means for driving a drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 231a of a first special figure start port (bottom) 231 as a normal electric accessory, or a first variable winning port as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the door member 2341a of the 234a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 or the first special figure start port (bottom) 231, the sensor circuit 322 has detected the ball. Is output to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 231, and the latched value corresponds to the special figure 1. It is stored in the built-in counter value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5 and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is performed on condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 or the special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 6A, three types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure C", are shown. In FIG. 6A, the white part in the figure shows a lamp that goes out, and the black part shows a lamp that turns on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” and “special figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the jackpot After the game is finished, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a jackpot that is practically difficult to win in some rounds may be prepared. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure fluctuates between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). ) Increases to 100/100 (that is, it always hits). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 231a is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 231a, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game balls are picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a (these variable winning openings may be called "attacker"). This is because if the number of prizes for the game ball to (.) Is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 increases, the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the electric support state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure C" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 6B, eight types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure h" are shown, and five types of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure h"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal big hit symbol, and when "Special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. Further, "special figure c" is a 3R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a real 1R big hit that can be expected to get a ball in one of the three rounds, and when "special figure c" is stopped and displayed. The second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure d" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a big hit that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 6 rounds, and when "special figure d" is stopped and displayed, the second The variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure e" is a 10R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a big hit that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 10 rounds, and when "special figure e" is stopped and displayed, the second The variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols (“special symbol f” and “special symbol g”) are prepared as small hit symbols. If a small hit is made with "Special Figure f", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbol is stopped, and if a small hit is made with "Special Figure g". After the symbol is stopped, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times. That is, more game balls are more likely to enter the second variable winning opening 235a when a small hit is made with the "special figure g" than when a small hit is made with the "special figure f". You can get balls. The opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Further, there may be one type of small hit symbol. Further, in the small hit game, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game is performed. The hit game is completed, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 1 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to a big hit game, special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to a big hit game, special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one special figure becomes a big hit, the variation display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variation display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure h" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (top) 230, the special figure 1 start port (bottom) or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 or the special figure 1 start port ( The decoration is provided on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the lower) or the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. In each of the symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly changed, the decorative symbol is changed in accordance with the changed display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the second special figure display device 214 confirms that the 10R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit with, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, there are 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". A combination of a series of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is "special figure e"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol C" or "special symbol h", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 6D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, an initialization process is executed to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not the information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In the present embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery processing, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. When it matches with the general winning opening 226a, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (top) 230, the first special figure starting port ( Bottom) It is determined that the ball has entered 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or has passed through the normal figure start port 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that the winning ports 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting ports 230, 231,232, 228, 252 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port (top) sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port (top) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information. Determines that the first special figure start port (top) 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and is accompanied by the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (top) 230. Processing is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (top) 230 is performed. Branch to the subsequent processing without performing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stop manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the number of prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 blink alternately. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display a lost symbol. The on / off drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 6 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 231a is set to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 231a of the first special drawing start port (bottom) 231 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 231a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 231a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the general drawing is performed. In this lottery process related to the normal figure, the normal figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by a random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The on / off drive control is performed by repeating the on / off of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a 3R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure e and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 6B are on, the special figure probability change flag is also on, and the normal figure probability change flag is off. In the case of either special figure b or special figure d, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a and 3R jackpot flag are on, special If the figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure c, if the small hit flag is on, either special figure f or special figure g, or if the loss flag is on, The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode of the special figure h, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol e), a 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram b, special diagram d), and a 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram c), 6R. Usually, one of the big hit symbol (special symbol a), the small hit symbol (special symbol f, special symbol g), and the lost symbol (special symbol h) is fixedly displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variable display of the special figure 2, but the variable display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of special figure 2 regardless of the lottery result of special figure 1. Will be done. Further, in the case where the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display of, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time will be extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of Special Figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may disappear.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process, the special figure 2 is set to the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player to start is displayed, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a) (second variable winning opening). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). The signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds, 6 rounds or 3 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. In the present embodiment, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is set. Turn on the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the jackpot game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 231a of the special drawing 1 starting port (bottom) 231 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). .. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 231a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting port winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls will enter the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the jackpot game. Fig. 1 There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port (bottom) 231 and the number of game balls (number of balls to be ejected) that can be acquired during the big hit increases, resulting in increased gambling. , To solve this. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is "1", the number of balls to be ejected during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning on / off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 6R jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 6R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure B when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the special figure A when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the loss flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is performed so that each mode of the special figure C is obtained, and the special figure 1 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that there is. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 6R normal jackpot symbol (special figure A), the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (special figure B), and the lost symbol (special figure C). Display. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the variable display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the variable display of the special figure 1, but the variable display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of special figure 1 regardless of the lottery result of special figure 2. Will be done.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the game ball to pass through the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may disappear.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (a part of various solenoids 332) until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the first variable winning opening 234a. ), A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a, and the door closing time is managed in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in the storage area of the timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (6 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol The effect waiting period is indicated in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the player to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the display device 208 is to be completed is displayed. Set the information. In the present embodiment, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the time saving flag provided in. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the jackpot game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the lottery process related to the special figure 2, the variable game of the special figure 2 is not performed, the state of the special figure 2 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the lottery process is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. .. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the lottery process is suspended. Executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured so that a variable game can be started regardless of the presence or absence (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (bottom), and the normal game state and In the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probabilistic state becomes a big hit, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 is notified, or once the special figure 2 is started. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, the lottery is based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result of, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, so that a plurality of special figures can be changed at the same time. It is not limited to the above, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to display an effect according to the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, the basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, large winning opening opening Command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the form, when the special symbol variation start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not special figure 1 start port (top) 230 has won a prize, whether or not special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. This includes the presence / absence of a prize in the mouth 232, the presence / absence of a prize in the first variable winning mouth 234a, the presence / absence of a prize in the second variable winning mouth 235a, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination sorting table.

The normal figure hit / miss determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal figure hit / miss determination table used at the time of the normal figure hit / miss determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In the low probability state of the normal map (when the time is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time is shortened), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about / 199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about / 192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/655536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about / 180).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about / 174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about / 145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about / 93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as the result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery in the special figure 1. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery shown in FIG. 2, the small hit is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10). It should be noted that the small hit may be generated in the special figure 1. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but it is equated with almost the same probability. It is set to be profitable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is to be a big hit, but when shifting to the probabilistic state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to have different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is the variation display time of special figure 2. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, from 1 to 5 seconds. Therefore, in the special figure high probability state, as described above, when a right-handed hit is made, a large number of game balls can easily enter the second special figure start port 232, so that the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A large number can be performed, and as a result, the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, since it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in a state where the number of reserved symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is four (full tank), the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is longer than the time required for one special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds for the miss and the small hit, but the fluctuation time for the big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 9C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 or 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / fail determination is a big hit, either "special figure A" or "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 243a. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure e" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a. "Special figure c" is a 3R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a (2R of the 3Rs is a substantial 1R probability variation jackpot because the second variable winning opening 235a opens shortly), and "special figure d" , The 6R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and "Special Figure e" is the 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Regardless of the setting, each selection rate is 50/100 for "special figure a", 2/100 for "special figure b", 20/100 for "special figure c", and 3/100 for "special figure d". "Special figure e" is 25/100.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a small hit, either one of "special figure f" and "special figure g" is selected. As described above, "special figure f" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened once, and "special figure g" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened 12 times at the maximum. It is a small hit that repeats. In the small hit, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is as short as 0.06 seconds, but as described above, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a stays. Since it has an easy structure, it is possible to insert a plurality of game balls by opening and closing the shutter member 2351a once. Therefore, in the special figure probability variation state, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be ejected between large hits by generating a large number of small hits (particularly, small hits in "special figure g").

Further, in the present embodiment, since the big hit in the "special figure c" is actually a 1R probability variation big hit, when the big hit in the "special figure c" occurs, the player is made to think that the small hit has occurred. You may be able to.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 next to step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 11B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is next to step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, drawing instructions are given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor includes the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize. The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure start opening (bottom) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234a and the first. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (top) 230, the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 and the second special drawing starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226a.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous accessory ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test of the game machine.

In addition, when it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70% as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch substrate 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. For example, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion and the advance notice The appearance rate, the entry rate of the production mode, and the like can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, an example of the variation display of the special figures 1 and 2 in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above will be described. Here, FIG. 13A is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit during the change of the special figure 1, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart during the change of the special figure 1. It is a timing chart explaining an example of operation when special figure 2 becomes a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t11, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t12 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. To be started. It should be noted that the special figure 2 continues to display the symbol variation. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t13 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. Even at this time, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t14 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 227 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing reaches t15, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, while the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is the remaining symbol fluctuation. Regardless of the time, it ends when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the result of the hit / fail judgment is discarded, and the stop is displayed with the missed symbol. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t16 is reached, the big hit game is started. After that, when the jackpot game ends and the timing of t17 is reached, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended are digested, respectively, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 and the symbol variation display are digested. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the same time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special figure is discarded and the missed symbol is displayed. It has become so. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is pending when the big hit is made in the special figure 2 includes the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit, the big hit in the special figure 2 is applied. A big hit notice may be given during the big hit game or in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is started after the big hit game is completed.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 13B, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t21, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t22 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. To be started. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 580 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t23 is reached, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily suspended at this timing. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t24 is reached, the small hit game is started. Actually, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game shifts to the small hit game after waiting for the small hit start wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Strictly speaking, after the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is set at the timing of t23, the timer subtraction of the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is started in the next main control unit timer interrupt process. After that, when the small hit game is completed and the timing is t25, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. In reality, when the small hit game ends, the small hit game state ends after a standby state of the small hit end wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol fluctuation time resumes. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t26 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, since the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period of the small hit game due to the occurrence of the small hit of the special figure 2, from the start to the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The actual time taken is longer than the predetermined symbol fluctuation time (5 seconds), and more specifically, the small hit game related to the small hit ends after the small hit occurs in the special figure 2. The time taken until (interruption period) is added to the time. That is, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 was incorrect, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 should have arrived at the timing of t26', but a small hit occurred. As a result, the result of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 has been postponed until the timing of t26. The symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the timing of t26, and then when the symbol display time of special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t27 is reached, the symbol variation display is suspended. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, in Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 and the symbol display time elapses, the small hit game state is entered, and the predetermined small hit start wait time after the small hit game state starts. The small hit game starts after the lapse of time, and the small hit game state ends when the small hit end wait time elapses after the small hit game ends. Either one of the small hit end wait times may not be provided, or both may not be provided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the progress of the symbol variation display of the other special figure is temporarily stopped, and the small hit When the game is over, the progress is restarted.

In this embodiment, an example of operating in the manner described above has been introduced. For example, the hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) stop> stop display weight (for example, 0.5 seconds)> hit (big hit, small hit). Hit) Start weight (For example, 0.1 seconds for a small hit, several tens of seconds for a big hit (however, it may differ depending on whether it is the first hit or not).)> During a big hit game or during a small hit game> Hit (big hit) , Small hit) End weight (For example, 0.1 seconds for small hits, several tens of seconds for big hits (however, it may differ depending on whether it is the first hit or not).)> A series of symbol variation display start. The operation may be performed. Here, "~ start weight" and "~ end weight" may be expressed as "~ interval", and the hit start effect and the hit end effect are performed at this time.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a small hit is made in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the symbol is stopped in the special figure 1. If it is displayed and a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2 during the measurement of the symbol display time of Special Figure 1, the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1 is not interrupted.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 14, in each symbol display device (first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 14A is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation of each symbol display device in the normal game state, and FIG. 14B is a timing chart for each symbol display device when a small hit is made in the normal game state. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation in.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special diagram 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. After that, at the timing of t41, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, but the symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is also continued in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t42 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. To be started. In the special figure 1, the symbol variation display is continuously performed, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variation display of the decorative symbol. After that, before the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the shaking fluctuation display with the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols, and then the special figure 1 is out of alignment at the timing of t43. In addition to the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the off-the-shelf decorative symbols displayed due to the fluctuation of shaking. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t44 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the shaking variation display with the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols, and then at the timing of t45. , The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols displayed by the shaking fluctuation. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t46 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is consumed. At the same time as the display is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Although the variable display of the combined decorative symbol is not performed, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the variable display of the special figure 2 may also be performed. For example, the variable display by the minimum symbol is performed. Alternatively, the fourth symbol may be used to indicate whether or not the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being executed.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special diagram 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. After that, before the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the shaking fluctuation display with the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols, and then the special figure 1 is out of alignment at the timing of t51. In addition to the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the off-the-shelf decorative symbols displayed due to the fluctuation of shaking. In Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t52 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 580 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t53 is reached, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily suspended at this timing. However, in the present embodiment, although the progress of the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is temporarily interrupted, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the variation of the decorative symbol. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t54 is reached, the small hit game is started. After that, during the small hit game, the original symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the swing fluctuation display is started by the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. At the timing of', the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the slackening effect, which will be described later. This is because the variation display of the decorative symbol was displayed according to the original symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1, but the small hit game ended after the small hit occurred due to the small hit in the special figure 2. Since the timing until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed is postponed, from the timing when the symbol fluctuation time of the original special figure 1 elapses to the timing when the special figure 1 is actually stopped and displayed. During the period of, the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way will continue to display the shaking fluctuation. Therefore, the player has an excessive expectation that the design will be delayed until it is stopped and displayed, which not only reduces the interest of the game, but also that the decorative design may be displayed in a variable manner and become a big hit. You may be forced to do so. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in such a case, such a problem may be solved by executing the effect with a pause. After that, when the small hit game ends and the timing of t55 is reached, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol fluctuation time resumes. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pause effect is continuously performed until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t56 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pause effect ends in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1 with the out-of-order symbol, and the stop display is performed with the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t57 is reached, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is digested. The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the symbol of the special figure 1. On the other hand, in Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 continues. However, the length corresponding to the period from the original symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 to the actual stop display of the symbol in the special figure 1 is performed so as not to make the player bored. Therefore, it may be possible to suppress a decrease in playability. It should be noted that the time for executing the pause effect is the same as the time (interruption time) from when the special figure 2 stops and displays the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game, but it is not the same time. It may be executed at least during the period related to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening (second variable winning opening 235a) in the small hit game. In addition, a plurality of types of effects may be prepared for the pause effect, or only one type may be prepared. In addition, when preparing a plurality of types of squeezing effects, for example, they may be randomly selected, or the types of shaving effects may be changed during execution according to certain conditions. More specifically, for example, the type of the paused effect may be changed depending on whether or not a specific SP reach has been performed. Further, the timing at which the execution of the pause effect is started is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the pause effect may be started during the small hit game. The effect may be started before the small hit game starts.

Next, the first setting suggestion effect execution process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the first setting suggestion effect execution process. The first setting suggestion effect execution process is, for example, a process that is activated when an out-ball command is received from the main control unit 300. In addition to the out-ball command, it may be activated when a winning opening winning command is received. In the present embodiment, when an out-ball command or a winning opening winning command is received, points (setting suggestion points) corresponding to the types are counted in the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives an out-ball command output from the main control unit 300 when the game ball passes through the out-ball detection sensor SWout, the setting suggestion point is counted as "1" and the variable winning opening When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning opening winning command output from the main control unit 300 when the game ball enters (the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a), the setting suggestion point. Is now counted as "10". It should be noted that even when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning opening winning command transmitted when the ball is entered into another winning opening, the points corresponding to the winning opening may be counted. .. Further, the set suggestion points are counted only when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the out-ball command, and the set suggestion points are not counted when the game ball wins in various winning openings. Good. Further, the points to be counted may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the count number by receiving the out-ball command is set to "1", while in the big hit game state, the count number is set to "10". In the normal game state, it is easy to win a prize. In the special figure 1 start port (bottom) 230, the count number at the time of winning is reduced to increase the count number in the probabilistic state or the electric support state, or during a big hit game. Then, the count number at the time of winning the variable winning opening (1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a) is reduced, and the count number at the time of winning the variable winning opening is increased during the small hit game. You may. Further, when the out-ball command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), "1" may be counted. Further, by customizing the player, it may be possible to select a table for determining the number of counts for generating the first setting suggestion effect.

First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the setting suggestion point (P) stored in the RAM 408 is “3000” or more (step S501). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting suggestion point is "3000" or more (step S501; Yes), after resetting the value of the setting suggestion point (P) to "0" (step S503), the suggestion effect execution lottery The process is executed (step S505). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the setting suggestion point is "3000" or more, that is, if it determines that it is less than "3000" (step S501; No), this process ends.

In the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 draws whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the setting is high. Specifically, the determination table corresponding to the preset value set in advance from the settings 1 to 6 is read from the ROM 406, and a lottery is performed based on the read determination table to determine whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, determination tables corresponding to the settings 4 to 6 are prepared, and the occurrence probabilities are different for each. For example, in setting 4, 1/4 and the first setting suggestion effect are likely to appear, in setting 5, 1/8 and the first setting suggestion effect are less likely to appear than in setting 4, and in setting 6, 1/16. The first setting suggestion effect is less likely to appear than setting 4 and setting 5. Although the determination table corresponding to the setting 3 or less is not prepared in the present embodiment, it may be prepared. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may appear only during a specific period. For example, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of symbol variation display The first setting suggestion effect may appear only until is performed. In this configuration, the player may also be able to recognize that the setting has been changed. Further, the appearance rate in each setting of the first setting suggestion effect described above is merely an example, and the appearance rate can be appropriately set.

Further, in the first setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the shoji is opened in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a cigarette is blown out with a “high setting!” The character GLG of the old man who smokes has appeared, and it corresponds to the production that at least suggests to the player that it is a high setting. The appearance position of the Gol grandfather character GLG differs depending on the appearance timing, but may be the same. It goes without saying that the content of the production is not limited to this, and any content may be used as long as it is at least suggesting to the player that the setting is high.

The CPU 404 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect as a result of the lottery in the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S507). When the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S507; YES), the CPU 404 executes the execution timing selection process (step S509). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S507; No), the CPU 404 ends this process.

In the execution timing selection process, the CPU 404 selects whether to promptly start the first setting suggestion effect or to start at another timing. For example, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is promptly started with a probability of 70%, and the first setting suggestion effect is started at the start of the next symbol variation display with a probability of 30%. When executing the first setting suggestion effect, it may be always started promptly, or it may be always started at a timing different from the timing of the execution determination.

As a result of making a selection in the execution timing selection process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to promptly start the first setting suggestion effect (step S511). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the first setting suggestion effect is to be started promptly (step S511; No), the start setting is such that the first setting suggestion effect is executed at the start timing selected / determined in the execution timing selection process. (Step S513), this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is to be started promptly (step S511; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. (Step S515).

When it is determined that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; Yes), the CPU 404 performs a first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process for drawing whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S515; Yes). Step S521). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; No), it determines whether or not the SP reach is in progress (step S517). When the CPU 404 determines that the SP reach is in progress (step S517; Yes), the first setting suggestion effect is performed after the start of the symbol variation display started after the SP reach ends or after the start of the jackpot start effect. After setting the start so that is started (step S519), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that SP reach is in progress (step S517; No), the process of step S513 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Further, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect as a result of performing the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery in the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process in step S521 (step S523). When the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S523; Yes), the CPU 404 makes a start setting so that the first setting suggestion effect is continuously started after the second setting suggestion effect is completed (step S523; Yes). Step S525), this process is terminated. That is, by shifting the execution period of the second setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect and eliminating the period in which both are performed at the same time, it may be possible to make the effect easier for the player to understand.

Next, the advance notice effect determination process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating the advance notice effect determination process. The advance notice effect determination process is mainly performed when the main control unit 300 pre-reads, for example, that the special (SP) reach is executed in the special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 8: step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. A pre-reading result information command including information indicating that the execution of the SP reach has been pre-read is transmitted from the control unit 300 to the first control unit 400, and after the first control unit 400 receives this, the next symbol variation display is displayed. This process is started when the symbol change start command is received. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the explanation, when the SP reach is executed, the pre-reading result information command including the information to that effect is transmitted, but the SP reach is not limited to other types. When the symbol variation display is pre-read, the pre-reading result information command including the information related to the symbol variation display may be transmitted.

First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the look-ahead flag has already been set in the RAM 408 (step S601). The look-ahead flag is a flag that is set when a look-ahead result information command is received from the main control unit 300, and is cleared when the look-ahead notice ends.

When the CPU 404 determines that the look-ahead flag is set (step S601; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S603). The continuous notice flag is a flag that is set while the continuous notice is being executed, and is cleared when the continuous notice ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the look-ahead flag is set (step S601; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

If the CPU 404 does not determine that the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S603; No), the CPU 404 executes the continuous advance notice lottery process (step S605). Specifically, a lottery is performed using the continuous advance notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection shown in FIG. 18A. Here, FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the continuous advance notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection.

When the CPU 404 receives the pre-reading result information command including the pre-reading information that the SP reach is executed in the continuous notice lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selection continuous notice selection table shown in FIG. 18A. , The record to be used is selected depending on whether it is a big hit or a miss. In this continuous advance notice lottery, the same table is selected regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, when a pre-reading result information command including pre-reading information that the jackpot SP reach (or missed SP reach) is executed is received, the continuous notice is executed with the same probability regardless of the setting. It will be. Actually, since the jackpot probability differs between the settings, it can be said that the probability of occurrence of continuous notice also differs between the settings as a whole, but it is pre-read that the jackpot SP reach will be executed. It can also be said that the probability that the continuous notice will be executed in such a case and the probability that the continuous notice will be executed when it is pre-read that the out-of-SP reach will be executed are the same regardless of the setting.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the CPU 404 receives the pre-reading result information command including the pre-reading information that the SP reach that becomes a big hit is executed, the CPU 404 executes the continuous advance notice with a probability of 1/2. Judgment is made, and it is determined that the continuous notice is not executed with a probability of 1/2. Further, when the CPU 404 receives the pre-reading result information command including the pre-reading information that the SP reach that is out of order is executed, it determines that the continuous advance notice is executed with a probability of 1/5, and has a probability of 4/5. Judges that the continuous notice is not executed.

As a result of executing the continuous notice lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous notice has been won (step S607). When the CPU 404 determines that the execution of the continuous advance notice is won (step S607; Yes), after setting the continuous advance notice flag (step S609), the combination of decorative symbols is changed to "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". It is set so as to be a combination of chance eyes (step S611), and the process proceeds to step S623. Here, the combination of the chance eyes of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, which is a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, as a look-ahead notice, a continuous notice using a stop symbol of a decorative symbol may be executed, or a stop display may be displayed by a combination of chance eyes when a setting suggestion described later is performed.

Further, when the CPU 404 determines in step S603 that the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S603; Yes), the CPU 404 shifts to the process of step S611 and sets the combination of decorative symbols to the above-mentioned chance. ..

If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S607 that the execution of the continuous notice has been won (step S607; No), the CPU 404 shifts to the process of step S613, and the symbol variation display rotates 50 times after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is as follows (step S613). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; Yes), whether or not the stop display of the chance eye as a suggestion effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display. (Step S615).

If the CPU 404 does not determine that the suggestion effect has been executed in the previous symbol variation display (step S615; No), the CPU 404 executes the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S617). Specifically, a lottery is performed using the SP reach selection setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. 18 (b). Here, FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of SP reach selection.

In the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selection time setting suggestion effect selection table, reads the record corresponding to the selected setting, and determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. Specifically, in the case of settings 1 to 3, the suggestion effect is not executed, in the case of setting 4, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16, and the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 15/16. do not do. In the case of setting 5, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/8, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 7/8. In the case of setting 6, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/4, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 3/4. Therefore, if the SP reach is executed and the continuous advance notice execution lottery is missed, the suggestion effect execution lottery may be performed, and the probability that the suggestion effect is executed also differs between the settings. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is not performed in the settings 1 to 3, and the suggestion effect is easily executed in the order of setting 6> setting 5> setting 4. It should be noted that the suggestion effect may also be performed in settings 1 to 3. Further, the selection rate of the suggestion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be appropriately set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on, the suggestion effect described later may be executed, and when it exceeds 50 rotations, the suggestion effect is performed. It is configured not to be executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed on condition that the symbol variation display is within 50 rotations after the power is turned on, but the period during which the suggestion effect can be executed can be appropriately set. It is possible, and the period during which the suggestion effect can be performed may not be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop display of the chance eye as the suggestion effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the suggestion effect execution lottery is not performed in the next symbol variation display. It prevents the production from being executed continuously, which may disappoint the player that it was not a continuous production, but the setting may be high enough to give a chance as a suggestive production. May be able to have expectations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the table is set so that the probability of executing the suggestion effect changes according to the selected setting, but the setting is not changed when the setting is changed. The table may be set so that the suggestion effect is more easily executed than in the case. Further, the table may be set so that the suggestion effect is more easily executed when the setting is changed to the high setting than when the setting is not changed.

As a result of executing the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the suggestion effect execution has been won (step S619). When the CPU 404 determines that the execution of the suggestion effect is won (step S619; Yes), the CPU 404 sets the combination of decorative patterns so as to be the chance eye combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" (step S619; Yes). The process shifts to step S621) and step S623. In the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect, either a continuous notice or a suggestion effect is specified by stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" as in the case of continuous notice. It cannot be done, but it may be possible to give the player some expectation.

On the other hand, in step S613, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; No), it determines that the suggestion effect was executed in the previous symbol variation display. (Step S615; Yes), and if it is not determined that the execution of the suggestion effect has been won (step S619; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

Next, in step S623, the CPU 404 starts the symbol variation display this time in the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time. The variation display result of FIG. 2 is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the result causes a small hit (step S623). The CPU 404 can determine whether or not the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the special figure stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and the special figure 2 can be determined by the read-ahead flag. It is possible to specify whether or not FIG. 1 is a small hit. When the CPU 404 determines that a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the look-ahead flag is set in the RAM 408 (step). S625). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that a small hit will occur in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; No), the CPU 404 ends the advance notice effect determination process.

When the CPU 404 determines that the pre-reading flag is set (step S625; Yes), the CPU 404 executes the pre-reading advance notice lottery process (step S627). As shown in FIG. 14B, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the CPU 404 initially displays the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the pre-reading notice lottery process. The pause effect is executed after the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, and it is determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead notice (pause look-ahead notice effect) as the delay effect during this period. In the present embodiment, whether or not to give a pre-reading notice is set to be carried out with a probability of 1/2, for example, but the pre-reading notice may be given without fail.

The CPU 404 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice lottery has been won as a result of performing the pre-reading notice lottery (step S629). When the CPU 404 determines that the pre-reading notice lottery has been won (step S629; Yes), the type of small hit (whether the small hit is made with "special figure f" or the small hit is made with "special figure g"). This process is terminated after the setting is made so that the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed for a while according to (step S631).

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine in step S625 that the look-ahead flag is set (step S625; No), or if it does not determine in step S629 that the pre-reading notice lottery has been won (step step S629). ; No), the process proceeds to step S633, and it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time is accompanied by SP reach (step S633). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; Yes), it is a pause effect without including a notice, and while the background or the like is changed. The setting is made so that the stage change effect is executed (step S635). In the symbol fluctuation display including SP reach, a small hit may occur in Special Figure 2, and it may take a long time for the SP reach to end and the symbol to be confirmed and displayed, but if the fluctuation continues during this period, , It may give the player a sense of unnecessary expectation that it will fluctuate again and become a big hit. In the present embodiment, in the case of performing the staggered effect after the SP reach is performed, by performing the stage change effect, it is possible to switch the unfortunate mood due to the fact that the SP reach is missed, and the stage is missed. In some cases, it can be easily recognized. Regarding the special figure 1, the content of the staggered effect may be different between the symbol variation display that is lost when SP reach is executed and the symbol variation display that is missed without the reach effect. Further, the stage change effect may be performed after the result of executing a certain SP reach having high jackpot reliability is out of order. In addition, if the stage is not accompanied by the reach effect, the stage may be changed by performing the effect with a delay. In addition, when a certain SP reach is executed and is missed, if a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 and the stage is not interrupted, a stage change effect is performed, but a certain SP reach is executed and the player is missed. In such a case, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2, the stage change effect may not be accompanied by the delay effect. In addition, when a certain SP reach with high jackpot reliability is executed and it is missed, when a small hit occurs in special figure 2 and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted, a stage change effect is accompanied. The production may be performed after a while.

On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; No), the CPU 404 is set so that the normal pause effect is performed as the pause effect (step S633; No). Step S637).

After that, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S639). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S639; No), the CPU 404 ends the advance notice effect determination process after clearing the look-ahead flag (step S641). On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice flag is set (step S639; Yes), the CPU 404 ends the advance notice effect determination process without executing the process of step S641.

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the SP reach is pre-read (that is, when the selection of a specific variable time is pre-read), the execution lottery for the continuous advance notice effect and the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect are performed. However, regarding the setting suggestion effect, the execution lottery may be performed even if it is pre-read that another variable time has been selected, or the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the result of the pre-reading. A lottery may be held.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect is not won, the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed, but the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect and the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect are separately performed. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the history of execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the history of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed by, for example, operating the operation key unit 190 in the standby state. In this case, the history in which the continuous notice is executed and the history in which the setting suggestion effect is executed may not be distinguished, and may be displayed as, for example, the history in which the chance eye appears. Further, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed and the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect and the setting suggestion effect is performed by the tables shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. For example, the DIP switch of the DIP switch board 198 is operated. By doing so, the appearance rate of the continuous notice effect and the setting suggestion effect may be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the continuous notice effect is performed even when the execution of the out-of-order SP reach is pre-read, but the execution lottery for the continuous notice effect is performed only when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read. You may do so. According to this, since a big hit is always obtained by executing the continuous notice effect, the expectation for the big hit is further increased, and on the other hand, if the chance eyes do not appear continuously, it is a setting suggestion effect. It can be seen that the game can be further enhanced. In addition, during the period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the period from the power-on to 50 rotations), the continuous notice effect is produced both when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read and when the execution of the missed SP reach is pre-read. In the period other than the period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the period exceeding 50 rotations after the power is turned on), the execution lottery is performed and the continuous notice effect is executed only when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read. In the period when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the continuous notice effect may be executed so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read and the lottery for executing the continuous notice effect is deviated, the lottery for executing the setting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, in the period from when the power is turned on until the symbol variation display is executed 50 rotations, even if the chance eye is displayed by suggesting the setting, the jackpot symbol is accidentally and finally confirmed and displayed. There is. Therefore, even when the setting suggestion effect is executed, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, although it is suppressed that the setting suggestion effect is continuously executed, it may be continuously executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, the continuous advance notice effect is performed from the next symbol change display in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. Although it will be executed, it may be possible to suppress the execution of the continuous advance notice effect at the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a look-ahead flag, and when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed, but even if the pre-reading notice effect is not performed. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed according to the type of small hit, but the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed regardless of the type of small hit. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the content of the staggered effect is made different depending on whether or not the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach. , The content of the paused effect may be the same regardless of whether or not SP reach is performed.

Next, the first jackpot suggestion effect selection process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit. The first jackpot suggestion effect selection process is a process executed when, for example, a special figure variation start command indicating that a symbol variation display to be a jackpot has been started is received from the main control unit 300 in the normal game state. is there.

First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the current set value stored in the RAM 408 (step S701).

Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (step S703). When the CPU 404 determines that the probability variation jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the CPU 404 refers to the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first probability variation jackpot re-lottery shown in FIG. 18D stored in the ROM 406 (step S705). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the CPU 404 refers to the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first normal jackpot re-lottery shown in FIG. 18C stored in the ROM 406 (step S707).

Subsequently, the CPU 404 selects a field to be used for the lottery from the referenced table and the current set value read from the RAM 408, and determines the combination of the decorative symbol before the re-variation and the decorative symbol after the re-variation. The determination process is executed (step S709). More specifically, when the result of the symbol variation display this time is a normal jackpot (for example, a jackpot in "Special Figure A"), the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first normal jackpot re-lottery in FIG. 18C is displayed. Referenced, if any of settings 1 to 3, there is a 100% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration" Select any combination of jackpot decorative patterns from "0-decoration 0" (excluding "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7").

With setting 4, there is a 90% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and a 10% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will change before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration". Select one from "8-Decoration 8" and set the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery to "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4". As a result, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more.

In addition, if the setting is 5, there is a 70% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not be changed before and after the re-variation, and a 20% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, re-drawing. The combination of jackpot decorative patterns before the lottery is "Decoration 0-Decoration 0-Decoration 0", "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" and "Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration" Select one from "8" and change the combination of jackpot decorative symbols after re-lottery to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" with a 5% chance of changing the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", "decoration 6-". Select one from "Decoration 6-Decoration 6" and "Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8", and change the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery to "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" and 5%. There is a probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Either one is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

In addition, if the setting is 6, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is not changed before and after the re-variation with a 50% probability, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is changed before and after the re-lottery with a 36% probability, that is, re-drawing. The combination of jackpot decorative patterns before the lottery is "Decoration 0-Decoration 0-Decoration 0", "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" and "Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration" Select one from "8" and change the combination of jackpot decorative symbols after re-lottery to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", and change the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery with a 7% chance. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", "decoration 6-". Select one from "Decoration 6-Decoration 6" and "Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8", and change the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery to "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5", which is 7%. There is a probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Either one is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. In addition, there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is executed before and after the re-lottery.

Further, when the result of the symbol variation display this time is a probability variation jackpot (for example, a jackpot in "Special Figure B"), the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first probability variation jackpot re-lottery in FIG. 18 (d) is referred to and set. If it is any of 1 to 3, there is a 70% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative patterns will not change before and after the re-variation, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0". (Excluding "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7"), select any combination of jackpot decorative patterns. In this case, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game or during the jackpot end effect, an effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game may be performed. In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and the combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will not change. Select. In addition, there is a 25% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3 "and" Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "), select any combination of jackpot decoration patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery. The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As a result, it may be possible to notify that the player will shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed by looking at the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols.

With setting 4, there is a 60% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative patterns will not change before and after the re-variation, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ("decoration" 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3 "and" Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 ") are selected from any combination of jackpot decorative patterns. In this case, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game or during the jackpot end effect, an effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game may be performed. In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and the combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will not change. Select. In addition, there is a 25% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3 "and" Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "), select any combination of jackpot decoration patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery. The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, there is a 2% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6 "and" Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 ", and the combination of jackpot decoration patterns after re-lottery is" Decoration 4-Decoration 4 " -Decoration 4 ". In addition, there is an 8% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 5-decoration 5". -Decoration 5 "and" Decoration 9-Decoration 9-Decoration 9 "are selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is set to" Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 ". In this embodiment, by changing from a combination of odd-numbered jackpot decorative symbols to a combination of even-numbered jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery, a seemingly contradictory effect of downgrading the appearance is performed, so that the probability changes after the jackpot game. In some cases, the expectation of transition can be further increased. When the combination of the odd-numbered symbols to the even-numbered symbols and the decorative symbols of the big hit is changed before and after the re-lottery effect, the setting suggestion may always be included. In addition, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols is different before and after the re-lottery, and the combination of jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery is "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", so that the player is set to 4 or more. It may be possible to suggest that.

In addition, if the setting is 5, there is a 40% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Select any combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7"). In this case, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game or during the jackpot end effect, an effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game may be performed. In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and the combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will not change. Select. In addition, there is a 25% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3 "and" Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "), select any combination of jackpot decoration patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery. The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, there is a 4% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6 "and" Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 "are selected, and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery is" Decoration 4-Decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". In addition, there is a 16% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 5-decoration 5". -Decoration 5 "and" Decoration 9-Decoration 9-Decoration 9 "are selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is set to" Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 ". In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "," Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6 "and" Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 ", and a big hit after re-lottery The combination of decorative patterns is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 9-Decoration 9". -Select one from "Decoration 9" and set the combination of jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery to "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

In addition, if the setting is 6, there is a 20% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Select any combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7"). In this case, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game or during the jackpot end effect, an effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game may be performed. In addition, there is a 5% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will not change before and after the re-variation, and the combination of jackpot decorative symbols from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will not change. Select. In addition, there is a 25% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be changed from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3 "and" Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "), select any combination of jackpot decoration patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery. The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, there is a 6% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6 "and" Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 ", and the combination of jackpot decoration patterns after re-lottery is" Decoration 4-Decoration 4 " -Decoration 4 ". In addition, there is a 30% chance that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 5-decoration 5". -Decoration 5 "and" Decoration 9-Decoration 9-Decoration 9 "are selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is set to" Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 ". In addition, there is a 7% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "," Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6 "and" Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 ", and a big hit after re-lottery The combination of decorative patterns is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, there is a 7% probability that the combination of jackpot decorative symbols will be changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols before the re-lottery will be "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 9-Decoration 9". -Select one from "Decoration 9" and set the combination of jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery to "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. In addition, there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is executed before and after the re-lottery.

In the stop decorative symbol determination process, when the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery is determined using the table as described above, the CPU 404 stops before the re-lottery and after the re-lottery. The jackpot decorative symbol is set as a data so as to be a combination of the determined jackpot decorative symbols (step S711).

Subsequently, the CPU 404 reads out the output number setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current set value read from the RAM 408 (step S713). Specifically, if the current setting value is "4", the CPU 404 reads out the setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4 shown in FIG. 19A, and the current setting value is "5". If there is, read out the setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 5 balls shown in FIG. 19 (b), and if the current setting value is "6", set the number of balls for setting 6 shown in FIG. 19 (c). Read the suggestion effect selection table. Normally, when a good number (number of drills) for each 2500 is counted, such as "2500 pt" or "5000 pt", a "cut number display image" described later with a changed display mode is displayed ( For example, the display of the total number of winning total prize balls is enlarged and displayed) to notify the player to that effect, but in the present embodiment, in addition to the drill number display image displayed by the drill number in this way, Using the above-mentioned ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table, the display mode may be changed even when the number is other than the number of drills (for example, a number such as "4560" or "5550"). The display is designed to suggest that the setting is high.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the contents of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table will be described. Note that FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the ball ejection number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing the contents of the ball ejection number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 5. It is a figure which shows an example, and the figure (c) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 6. Although the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 is not prepared, it may be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the setting 4 ball ejection number setting suggestion effect selection table does not suggest a high setting according to the display mode of the total ball ejection number with a probability of 70%, and has a 10% probability of total ball ejection. Change the display mode of the total number of balls when the number becomes "4440", and change the display mode of the total number of balls when the total number of balls reaches "4560" with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls is "4440" and when the total number of balls is "4560". As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls during the big hit game, and may be able to have a feeling of expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more).

As shown in FIG. 19B, the setting 5 ball ejection number setting suggestion effect selection table does not suggest a high setting according to the display mode of the total ball ejection number with a probability of 50%, and has a 10% probability of total ball ejection. Change the display mode of the total number of balls when the number reaches "4440", and change the display mode of the total number of balls when the total number of balls reaches "4560" with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls is "4440" and when the total number of balls is "4560". The display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the number becomes "4440" and when the number becomes "5550", and when the total number of balls becomes "4560" with a probability of 5% and The display mode of the total number of balls is changed in both cases when the number becomes "5600". As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls during the big hit game, and may be able to have a sense of expectation for a high setting (setting 4 or more, or setting 5 or more). ..

As shown in FIG. 19C, the setting 6 ball ejection number setting suggestion effect selection table does not suggest a high setting according to the display mode of the total ball ejection number with a probability of 30%, and has a 20% probability of total ball ejection. Change the display mode of the total number of balls when the number reaches "4440", and change the display mode of the total number of balls when the total number of balls reaches "5550" with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls is "4440" and when the total number of balls is "5550". When the number becomes "6660", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls is "7777", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 15%. To. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls during the big hit game, and can have a feeling of expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more, or setting 6). In some cases.

As described above, the CPU 404 determines a change pattern of the display mode of the total number of balls using the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current set value, and displays the total number of balls with the determined change pattern. After setting to change (step S715), the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit ends.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is set to a setting difference by referring to a different table for each setting, but the high setting suggestion is performed at the same appearance rate regardless of the setting. It may be set so that the high setting suggestion is more likely to appear at the high setting, and conversely, the high setting suggestion may be less likely to appear at the higher setting. In particular, even if the appearance rate is the same regardless of the setting, since the jackpot probability differs between the settings, it may be said that the appearance rate naturally differs. Alternatively, since the setting suggestion does not actually produce a false effect in the first place, for example, if the setting is 1, the appearance rate will be 0%, and the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is naturally set. It can also be said that it changes with the difference. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the setting suggestion effect described so far, and can also be applied to the setting suggestion effect described below.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, in each symbol display device (first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 20A is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hit game in the normal game state, and FIG. 20B is the same. Is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device when a small hit is made in a normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the symbol variation display which is a small hit is performed in the special figure 2, but the special figure 1 is in the standby state. Further, since it is in the normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation of the decorative symbol, but displays it in the standby state. After that, at the timing of t61, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. When the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t62 is reached, the small hit game is started. Then, during the small hit game, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port (upper) 230 at the timing of t63, a lottery or the like for whether or not to make a big hit is performed, and then the symbol of special figure 1 changes. Although the display is started, since the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2 is in progress, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but the display is interrupted immediately. After that, when the small hit game ends at the timing of t64, the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed (substantially started). After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the original symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is approached, the swing fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of alignment, and then the delay effect is started at the timing of t65. .. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses at the timing of t66, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol. At the same time, the pause effect is finished, and the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns that are out of the way. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t67 is reached, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is digested. The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the symbol of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the shaking variation display with the combination of the outlier decorative symbols, and then at the timing of t68. , The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols displayed by the shaking fluctuation. Similarly, after that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t69 is reached, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, it has a game property that recommends left-handed hitting. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is detected in the normal game state (for example, the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is detected), for example, a warning display is displayed to the decorative symbol display device 208 to urge the left-handed hit. However, in the small hit game state, since it is not possible to give a profit to the player unless he hits right, a display prompting him to hit right is displayed even for a short time. In such a case, if a warning message is displayed to prompt the player to strike left immediately after the small hit game state is completed, the motivation for the game may be reduced. In the present embodiment, after the small hit game is completed, the display prompting the left strike is not performed for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds). This period (the period indicated by t64 to t70) may be referred to as a "left-handed warning suppression period". As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the right-handed hit is performed and the state continues, and the left-handed warning suppression period elapses even if the symbol variation display is started a plurality of times. Until then, the warning to urge left-handed is not given.

In this production example, if a game ball wins a prize at the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 during the small hit game related to the small hit in special figure 2, the symbol change of special figure 1 starts and the progress is interrupted. On the other hand, although the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol may not be started until the small hit game is completed. In this case, the execution time of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponds to the symbol variation time of the special figure 1, and the delay effect may not be executed. Alternatively, an effect different from the pause effect may be executed.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 20B, the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special diagram 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. After that, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol at the timing of t71 before the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses. At this time, the progress of the special figure 1 during the fluctuation display is temporarily suspended, and the suspension period is started. However, in the present embodiment, although the progress of the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is temporarily interrupted, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the variation of the decorative symbol. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t72 is reached, the small hit game is started. After that, even though the special figure 1 is the suspension period, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 continues, so that the SP reach may be shifted at the timing of t73. That is, it can be said that a situation may occur in which the SP reach effect is performed during the small hit game. Then, when the small hit game ends at the timing of t74, the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed. Then, a certain period from the timing of t74 (for example, 30 seconds, the period shown in t74 to t75) is a left-handed warning suppression period, so even if right-handed is continuously performed, if it is within the period. , No warning to left-handed. If right-handed hitting is performed even though the left-handed warning suppression period has elapsed at the timing of t75, a warning for left-handed hitting is issued. As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, when a long symbol variation time such as SP reach is selected, a small hit of the special figure 2 is generated during the symbol variation display according to the executing special figure 1. Even if it occurs, it can be said that a warning prompting left-handedness may be issued during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

FIG. 21 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special drawing 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the general map and a hold number display area of the general map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is consistent with the hold number shown in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 is the hold lamp 220 of the special figure 2. It is consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 21A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 21A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the variation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 580 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232 when it is out of the way or when it is a small hit.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure, which is easier to display the display result in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal gaming state or the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed as described above. , As shown in FIG. 21A, when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Special Figure 2 may be the same or different. ..

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 21B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. The hold icon and decorative design have not changed yet.

In FIG. 21 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 21D, the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 21E, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 21 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 21 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 21 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 21 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 21 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 21 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 21 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach) has developed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (o) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to SP reach.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 22 (p) following from FIG. 21 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 22 (s). In FIG. 22 (s), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, the display of the setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains disappeared, and only the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbol, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (v), the decorative design starts to change again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-", which are a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit and are determined to shift to a probabilistic state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (w), the probability variation jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed from the jackpot combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" as the combination of decorative patterns. It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is displayed. At this time, the effect display EF1 in which the star flashes is displayed around the decorative symbol after the stop, and it is notified that the combination of the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbols has been upgraded.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 6R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 22 (x) is stopped and displayed by "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". In FIG. 22 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 22 (y), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "Big chance big hit" are displayed together with the background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and the characters "Right hit!" Are displayed. Is urging right-handed. In the jackpot game start effect shown in FIG. 22 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a big hit that satisfies some condition (for example, only in the case of the first big hit after turning on the power), and only when a big hit of 5 consecutive chans or more occurs, among a plurality of big hits with different balls The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only in the case of the big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, 10R big hit, etc.).

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 22 (v), for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (w') to 22 (y'), the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from that before the re-lottery. There is. That is, it may be produced that the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the probabilistic jackpot is fixed does not stop and display, for example, the promotion effect in the jackpot effect can be given a sense of expectation, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. In some cases, expectations can be sustained.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types, and the degree to which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols changes before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the re-lottery effect executed. It may be changed, for example, the re-lottery effect of the mode accompanied by the movement of the accessory> the re-lottery effect by displaying the symbol variation by frame advance> the re-lottery effect by the high-speed fluctuation> the re-lottery effect by the slow fluctuation. The expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit will change before and after the lottery may be high. The order and mode of expectations are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 23 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a big hit game centered on a decorative symbol display device. In FIG. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (a), after the 6R probability variation jackpot (it is difficult to distinguish between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot in the production) in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The transition to the first round is shown. In the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Congratulations!" Along with the character of Miss Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the big hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot by the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, if the jackpot decoration symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a jackpot), As shown in FIG. 23 (a'), the characters "Congratulations on a big chance!" Are displayed instead of the characters "Congratulations!" To give a sense of expectation to a large number of balls. Then, the number of hits from the first big hit (including small hits; sometimes referred to as "continuous chan number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the big hit decoration when it becomes a big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. The design "decoration 4" is displayed. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the current number of rounds, "1R", is displayed as the number of rounds, and below that, the number of prize balls won in this big hit game and the number of prizes won in this big hit game are displayed. "32/480 get!" Is displayed to inform the expected number of prize balls. That is, since four game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a since the start of this big hit, the acquisition of the number of prize balls of 32 balls is notified, and in this big hit, 480 prize balls are used. It has been shown that acquisition can be expected. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and this value is the number of prize balls won in the big hit and the small hit (big hit, small hit) ends. It will be added (counted up) each time. Therefore, during the jackpot game related to the first jackpot, the total number of prize balls won is not counted up until the jackpot ends, and remains at "0pt". In addition, each time a prize ball is acquired in a hit, the number may be added to the total number of prize balls acquired. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a prize in the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added, but to other winning openings. The number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize may also be added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a specific general winning opening that can be won by hitting right may be added. It may be.

FIG. 23B shows how the third round of the game is being performed. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is a jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect is performed to notify whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. When the promotion effect is started, the characters "promotion chance!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to give a feeling of expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot. It should be noted that the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, and the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In the present embodiment, when it is confirmed that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot by the combination of decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot, the promotion effect is not performed, but the promotion effect may be performed, in this case. , The setting suggestion may be included.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23C, it is shown that the result of the promotion effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 23 (c), the state of success in the promotion effect is shown, and the characters "promotion!" And "next small hit RUSH rush" are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. On the other hand, if the promotion effect fails, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed as shown in FIG. 23 (c'). In addition, if the promotion production fails, it may be confirmed that it is a normal big hit, or other promotion productions (for example, reversal production in the ending) may be expected, and the probability is still changed. It may not be clear whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (c), it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the third round and 176 prize balls have been won. There is.

FIG. 23D shows how the sixth round is completed and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 23 (d), it is shown that the effect that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed is being performed. When the big hit end effect starts, the characters "small hit RUSH rush!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). In addition, an animation that counts up the total number of prize balls displayed at the bottom right of the display screen has started, and it is shown that the 480 prize balls won in this big hit are added. .. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the normal jackpot is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 23 (d'), the characters "big hit end" and "time saving rush!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed and notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, the display showing the total number of prize balls won will be counted up in the same way as when the state shifts to the probability change state even when the state shifts to the electric support state, and the display of the total number of prize balls won after the count-up is displayed. , It is displayed continuously until the electric support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the total number of prize balls won may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for success in the promotion effect during the big hit game may be changed by combining the decorative symbols of the big hit when the big hit is made. For example, the big hit in "decoration 3" or "decoration 7" (decoration 7) Probability change confirmation)> Big hit with odd-numbered symbols other than "Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7"> Big hit with even-numbered symbols may be made easier to succeed in promotion production.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a probabilistic gaming state centered on a decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

FIG. 24A shows a state in which the first symbol variation display is started after the jackpot game related to the first jackpot is completed and the state shifts to the probability variation state. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously displaying the symbol variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and therefore, when the jackpot game is completed, the special figure Both the symbol variation display of 1 and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 start at substantially the same time. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), the characters “small hit RUSH rush!” Displayed in the jackpot game end effect are continuously displayed, and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. On the left side of, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right of the display screen, an animation of counting up the number of prize balls (480) acquired in the big hit game related to the first big hit is continuously performed. In addition, a mini-design and a right-handed display instructing right-handed are displayed on the upper left.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 24A, three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, and the hold icons h21, h22, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 24A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), so by winning a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, This is to execute many variable displays in FIG.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24B shows a state when the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. As shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game, until the end of the four symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the “small hit RUSH rush” displayed in the big hit game end effect is completed. The characters "!" Are displayed continuously to make it appear as if the game is smoothly transitioning to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is over. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration". The stop display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "1". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "441" in accordance with this. It should be noted that the special figure 1 is continuously displayed with the symbol variation. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (b), the count-up animation in the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen has ended, and the prize was acquired in the jackpot game related to the first jackpot. "0480pt" indicating the number of prize balls is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (c), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the fourth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (c), there is no symbol variation display held in the special figure 1 (that is, hold 0), and the stop display is displayed as a result of the deviation. In addition, there is no symbol variation display held in Special Figure 2 (that is, hold 0). When hitting to the right, it is easy to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 242, so after the fourth special figure 2 symbol variation display starts, for example, four game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 242. After entering the ball, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), there are cases where four holds of special figure 2 are accumulated. That is, in FIG. 24 (d), four symbol variation displays of special figure 2 are held, and four hold icons h21 to h24 of special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (e), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the fourth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the characters "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect are still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (e), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the deviation, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also "decoration 9-decoration 6-decoration". The stop display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "2". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "962" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (f), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the fifth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. When the fifth symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 starts after the big hit game ends, the characters "Small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed from the big hit game end effect are erased, and the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, the probability change state). The letters "Small hit RUSH medium" indicating that it is (middle) are displayed above the display of the total number of prize balls won. In addition, it is shown that the decorative design, which was displayed small in the upper right part of the display screen, moves to the center of the display screen and expands to the size normally displayed. In the present embodiment, this may give a feeling of expectation to the pending ream chan. After that, it will be displayed in the same manner until it becomes a big hit or a small hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (g), it is shown that the fifth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (g), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also the "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8". It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (h), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is performed. In this embodiment, instead of displaying "small hit RUSH in progress", the characters "chance!" Are displayed to foretell that the hit (small hit or big hit) will occur. In addition, the characters "chance!" May not be displayed, the characters "chance!" May not be displayed, and "chance!" Is displayed during the small hit or big hit symbol variation display. The characters "" may be displayed without fail.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (i), the small hit symbol (“special symbol g”) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed accordingly. .. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "666" according to the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (j) shows that the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the characters "SMALL Bonus!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game disguised as a small hit game) is being performed. The number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is updated to "second time", and it is notified that it is the second consecutive chan. Further, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6" which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit is made is displayed, and it is notified that the hit combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. Has been done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (k), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 prize balls are acquired. , The characters "15/150 get!", Which indicates that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), it is shown that the small hit game is completed when 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 prize balls are acquired. At the same time, the characters "150/150 get!", Which indicates that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

After that, when the small hit game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 24 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probabilistic state is continuing. The characters "Hit RUSH continue!" Are displayed, and the decorative design is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right part of the display screen to show that the variable display is started. In addition, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen counts up, and it is shown that 150 prize balls acquired in the small hit game are added. .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game is not added during the small hit game, but is added after the symbol variation display after the small hit game is completed is started. ing. As a result, the player may be able to concentrate on the game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (n) shows a state when the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the small hit game is completed. As shown in FIG. 24 (n), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), the "small hit RUSH continues!" Until the four symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed! By continuing to display the characters "" and counting up the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game (big hit game) to the display of the total number of prize balls won, after the small hit game is completed. The production makes it look like a smooth transition to the probabilistic state. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (n), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the deviation, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". The stop display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "8". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (o), it is shown that the small hit is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed. Even at this timing, the animation that the display of the total number of prize balls won counts up continues. After that, the animation of counting up the display of the total number of prize balls won ends at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (p), and the number of 150 prize balls acquired during the small hit game is increased from "0480 pt" before the small hit. It is added and updated to "0630pt".

Next, the first setting suggestion effect as an example of the high setting suggestion effect displayed with the detection of the out sphere as at least a condition will be described with reference to FIG. 25. Here, FIG. 25 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a setting suggestion effect centered on a decorative symbol display device. This effect is a setting suggestion effect executed based on the first setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (1a) to 25 (1e) show how the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the normal gaming state. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (1a), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (1b), the point gauge PTG is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the characters "chance at gauge MAX" are displayed, giving a feeling of expectation that a setting suggestion may be made. It may be possible to have it. After that, every time the game ball passes through the out-ball detection sensor SWout, for example, 1 point is counted, and by winning the first start winning opening (upper) 230, for example, 5 points are counted and the points are updated. It is shown that the gauge increases as it is done. After that, when a predetermined number of points (for example, 3000 pt) are accumulated, the gauge in the point gauge PTG shows a full tank as shown in FIG. 25 (1d), and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the display screen is displayed. In the lower right part, the character GLG of the old man who smokes a cigarette appears with the characters "High setting!", Suggesting that it is "High setting!". In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the value is 4 or more, but the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the value is 4 or more or the setting is 3 or more. May be good. Further, when the setting is such that the first setting suggestion effect is not performed, the point gauge may not be displayed, or the point gauge may be displayed, but the first setting suggestion effect is not performed. It may be. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out-ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, there may be a winning opening in which points are added and a winning opening in which points are not added, or points may be added for each winning opening for all winning openings. In this case, the number of points to be added for each winning opening can be arbitrarily set. The point gauge PTG may be displayed at all times, or may be started to be displayed when the points are nearly full. Further, the points may not be indicated by gauges but may be indicated by numerical values. In this case, the numerical value may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only when the number of points is sharp (for example, 1000 points).

The production examples shown in FIGS. 25 (2a) to 25 (2b) show how the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the jackpot game state. In this production example, in the big hit game state, for example, when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (2a), it is shown that the jackpot game that has shifted to the probability variation jackpot has started. After that, for example, every time the game ball passes through the out-ball detection sensor SWout, for example, 1 point is counted, and every time the game ball passes through the first variable winning opening 234a, for example, 20 points are counted. 2 Every time the game ball passes through the special figure start port 232, for example, 10 points are counted, and when the points reach a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 25 (2b), the character GLG of the Gol grandfather during the big hit game. The first setting suggestion effect that appears may be performed, suggesting that the setting is high. The point gauge PTG described above may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out-ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, there may be a winning opening in which points are added and a winning opening in which points are not added, or points may be added for each winning opening for all winning openings. In this case, the number of points to be added for each winning opening can be arbitrarily set. Further, in the big hit game state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (3a) to 25 (3b) show that the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the probabilistic state. In this production example, even in the probabilistic state, for example, it is performed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (3a), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the characters "small hit RUSH in" indicating that the decorative symbol is in a probabilistic state are displayed on the right side of the display screen. It is displayed in the lower part. After that, when the points are added and reach a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 25 (3b), the first setting suggestion effect in which the Gol grandfather character GLG appears in the probabilistic state is performed, suggesting that the setting is high. May be done. The point gauge PTG described above may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the probability change state. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out-ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, there may be a winning opening in which points are added and a winning opening in which points are not added, or points may be added for each winning opening for all winning openings. In this case, the number of points to be added for each winning opening can be arbitrarily set. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the probability change state.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 25 (4a) to 25 (4b), neither the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 nor the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, there is no pending symbol variation display, and a big hit. It is shown that the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the standby state in which the state is not the game state (small hit game state). In this production example, for example, the number of points is a predetermined number in the customer waiting state (in the state where the stop result of the decorative symbol is displayed or in the state where the customer waiting demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 25 (4a) is performed. It is performed when it is accumulated. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (4a) is performing a customer waiting demonstration effect. After that, for example, no prize is won in any of the winning openings, and the product is out. When the number of points reaches a predetermined number due to the passing of the game ball to the ball detection sensor SWout, as shown in FIG. 25 (4b), the first setting suggestion that the Gol grandfather character GLG appears during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect. The effect may be performed to suggest that the setting is high. The point gauge PTG described above may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed while waiting for a customer. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out-ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the winning opening to which points are added There may be winning openings for which points are not added, or points may be added for each winning opening. In this case, how many points will be added for each winning opening. Can also be set arbitrarily. Further, even in the waiting state for customers, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed only during the execution of the demo effect waiting for customers, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed. The first setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the state where is displayed. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the customer waiting state.

25 (5a) to 25 (5c) show the operation when the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied during the SP reach. In this production example, when points are accumulated during SP reach and the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is delayed in order to concentrate the player on the SP reach. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (5a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing SP reach, and it is shown that the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are facing each other. At this timing, points are accumulated, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b), it is shown that the character of the lord wins and the decorative pattern sways and fluctuates with the combination of the big hits of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". However, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started even at the timing of FIG. 25 (5b), and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (5c), the SP reach effect is changed to the default background image, and the decorative pattern is the original size. The first setting suggestion effect is performed in which the Gol grandfather character GLG appears in a state of shaking and fluctuating. In the present embodiment, by doing so, the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect may be performed at the same time, so that the problem of not being able to concentrate on the effect may be less likely to occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b'), if the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative pattern fluctuates due to the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4", then , As shown in FIG. 25 (5c'), even after shifting from the SP reach effect to the default background image, the first setting suggestion effect is not started, and as shown in FIG. 25 (5d'), the next symbol is displayed. After the variable display starts, the first setting suggestion effect whose start has been suspended is started.

In this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach effect is completed so that the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed at the same time. However, the first setting suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the SP reach effect. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, it goes without saying that the start timing of the first setting suggestion effect executed after the SP reach effect is finished is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be started at any timing.

In addition, the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is delayed during the execution of the SP reach effect. For example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the execution of a specific advance notice effect, a specific look-ahead advance notice effect, or a specific reach effect. In this case, the start of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be delayed. Further, the start of execution of the setting suggestion effect may not be delayed, and the execution of these effects and the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be performed in duplicate.

FIG. 26 (1a) shows a state in which a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are simultaneously performed during the execution of the jackpot game end effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (1a), when the jackpot game end effect is started, a group of Sabohani appears, suggesting that the setting is high. The effect in which this group of Sabohani appears may be referred to as the second setting suggestion effect. Then, when points are accumulated during the execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the Gol grandfather character GLG is displayed superimposed on the Sabohani group, and a plurality of setting suggestion effects are displayed. It is shown that the above may be performed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the character GLG of the Gol grandfather is displayed by superimposing it on the Sabohani group in the second setting suggestion effect, but the Sabohani group is superimposed on the character GLG of the Gol grandfather. It may be displayed.

26 (2a) to 26 (2b) are production examples in which there is a case where the production example is performed separately from the production example shown in FIG. 26 (1a), and the second setting suggestion production is performed during the jackpot game end production. , When points are accumulated in this state and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, it is avoided to execute it in combination with the second setting suggestion effect, and after the second setting suggestion effect is completed. It shows how the first setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (2a), when the jackpot game end effect is started, a group of Sabohani may appear, suggesting that the setting is high. In this case, points may be accumulated and the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be decided. In this case, in the jackpot game end effect, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 26 (2b), when the symbol variation display started after the jackpot game ends is started. The grandfather's character GLG is displayed, and it is shown that the first setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, if the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the start of the first setting suggestion effect is reserved until the end of the second setting suggestion effect. You may do so.

26 (3a) to 26 (3d) are diagrams illustrating a menu mode in which the player shifts by operating the operation key unit 190 or the effect button 136 in the standby state. In this embodiment, the operation key unit 190 and the effect button 136 are operated not only during the execution of the demo effect shown in FIG. 26 (3a) but also in the standby state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. With, it is possible to shift to the menu mode, but it may be possible to shift to the menu mode only during the execution of the demo production.

For example, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3a), the menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (3b). On the menu screen, "member registration", "password input", "passcode issuance", "volume / brightness setting", and "setting suggestion setting" can be performed. The "member registration" is for registering in the customer database managed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100. In the "password input", the player can register the game history of the player so far in the pachinko machine 100 by inputting the two-dimensional code or password downloaded from the manufacturer here. As a result, for example, a notice that does not usually appear may appear, or the reliability of the notice may be changed. "Password issuance" is to display the game history of the pachinko machine 100 in a two-dimensional code or a character code at the request of the player. The player can register the game history in the database by capturing the displayed two-dimensional code or character code with a mobile terminal or the like and uploading it to the manufacturer via the Internet. In the "volume / brightness setting", the player operates the operation key unit 190 to adjust the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 of the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the brightness of various decorative lamps. can do.

When the player operates the operation key unit 190 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3b) to operate the "setting suggestion setting", the player displays the "setting suggestion effect customization" screen as shown in FIG. 26 (3c). Transition. On this "Customize setting suggestion effect" screen, the characters "Select a game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect is likely to appear" are displayed, and the game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) is likely to appear is displayed. You can select from any of "normal game state", "probability change state", "electric support state", and "big hit game in progress". It should be noted that other gaming states may be selectable. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3c), the cursor is placed on the item "easy to appear in normal time", the item is highlighted, and the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear in the normal game state. It is shown that it has been set. It should be noted that two or more items may be selectable, or only one item may be selectable.

When the game state in which the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear is selected as described above, as shown in FIG. 26 (3d), the type of setting suggestion effect that is likely to appear is selected from the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects. Can be done. Specifically, "suggestion by the number of balls" that suggests the setting based on the total number of prize balls won from the first jackpot, and "big hit" that suggests the setting by displaying the number of big hit start numbers, which is the number of symbol fluctuation displays between jackpots. One of "Suggested by the start", "Suggested by the re-lottery" that suggests the setting in the re-lottery production at the time of big hit, and "Suggested by the stop symbol" that suggests the setting by the appearance of the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eye. Alternatively, two or more can be selected. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3d), it is shown that two suggestion effects of "suggestion by the number of balls" and "suggestion by re-lottery" are set to be feasible, and other setting suggestion effects appear. It is designed not to be done. In the present embodiment, the types of setting suggestion effects that appear are set, but the appearance rate of each of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be set.

Next, an example of the re-lottery effect executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. Here, FIG. 27 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a re-lottery effect centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 27A shows that as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols of the hit (big hit) of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" sways and fluctuates. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the decorative symbol that has been swaying and fluctuating starts to fluctuate at high speed and the re-lottery effect is successful, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the probability change jackpot is confirmed. A combination of 6R probability variation jackpot decoration symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" to be notified is derived, and an effect display in which stars flash to make it easier to recognize that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed. EF1 is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the probability variation jackpot has been achieved. After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 6R probability variation jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. Along with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed as "777", and "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. A stop display is displayed, indicating that it is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit but it is not clear whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot is promoted to the combination of decorative symbols that confirms that it is a probabilistic jackpot, the effect is displayed. EF1 is displayed to recognize the promotion.

On the other hand, if the re-lottery effect fails, as shown in FIG. 27 (c'), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed again, and the shaking is changed. In this case, the effect display EF1 may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is not changed in the re-lottery effect, and the effect display EF1 is displayed even if it fails. Therefore, for example, the promotion effect during the big hit game is always successful, and the probability change big hit is at least. It is suggested. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is a probabilistic jackpot. It should be noted that the setting suggestion may be included by displaying the effect display EF1. After that, when the symbol variation time elapses and the timing of the symbol stop display is reached, as shown in FIG. 27 (d'), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed. Along with this, the mini symbol whose display is displayed in the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as "111", and "○" in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. Is stopped and displayed, indicating that it is a big hit. Further, when the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit does not change before and after the re-lottery effect, but the effect display EF1 is displayed, only the setting suggestion may be included. For example, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 1 is denied. Setting suggestions may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect with the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, setting 4 or higher is confirmed. Setting suggestions may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect with the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 6 is confirmed. Suggestions may be made, and conversely, it may be a more pleasing effect for the player than when not promoted by the re-lottery.

Further, in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect fails, the setting may be suggested. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect fails, it is a normal operation to make the combination of decorative symbols displayed before and after the re-lottery the same, but as shown in FIG. 27 (c''), It is a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols that confirms that it is a probabilistic jackpot, and may be different before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols before the re-lottery was "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", but as a result of the re-lottery, the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" Combinations may be derived. In the present embodiment, the setting may be suggested by making the jackpot symbol different before and after the re-lottery in this way. In this case, as shown by the symbol after the re-lottery, it is an effect suggesting that the setting is 4 or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed even though the re-lottery effect has failed so that the player can easily recognize that the effect is a setting suggestion effect, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. It should be noted that the effect display EF1 may not be displayed, and when the effect display EF1 is displayed, it is a probabilistic big hit, for example, an effect that succeeds in promotion is performed by a promotion effect during a big hit game. It may include suggesting that. Further, when the effect display EF1 is not displayed, the setting suggestion may not be included. After that, when the symbol variation time elapses and the timing of the symbol stop display is reached, as shown in FIG. 27 (d ″), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is confirmed and displayed. Along with this, the mini symbol whose display is displayed in the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as "444", and "○" in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. Is stopped and displayed, indicating that it is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the re-lottery effect fails, the setting may be suggested, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbol of the big hit and the display of the effect display EF1 may be related to the setting suggestion. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed when the re-lottery effect is successful and when the setting is suggested, and the mode of the effect display EF1 is the same, but the content of the effect is different. You may be. Further, when the effect display EF1 is displayed and the setting suggestion is given, it may be a false setting suggestion. For example, the higher the setting, the easier the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is. The lower the setting, the less likely it is that the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is made. Further, in this effect example, the setting suggestion is made by displaying the effect display EF1, but for example, the setting suggestion may be made by making the color or pattern of the pattern different from the usual one. , The audio output when it becomes a big hit is different from the usual one (usually "Congratulations" is output, but in the case of setting suggestion, it is output as "chance" etc.) May be done. Further, the setting suggestion may be performed by using another probability change confirmation effect, and the setting suggestion may be performed by executing the probability change confirmation effect at a timing different from the normal execution timing. , The probability change confirmation notification may include a setting suggestion. Further, the setting suggestion may be made depending on the effect content in the re-lottery effect. For example, the display requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is a mode different from the usual mode (a mode in which the color difference and the size are different from the normal mode). In some cases, the setting suggestion may be included, or the setting suggestion may be made because the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) required to be operated at the time of re-lottery is different from the usual one.

The setting suggestion in the re-lottery effect may be made feasible when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, it is set when the number of symbol variation display times between big hits is small, such as within 30 times from the previous big hit. Suggestions may be made. Further, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be used to set the date of the event in the amusement park, and the setting suggestion may be given on the date. Further, for example, the generation condition may be customized by the player on the setting screen that can be transferred during the demo production, and the setting suggestion may be given when the customized condition is satisfied. Needless to say, the above can be applied to the setting suggestion effect described so far, and can also be applied to the setting suggestion effect described later.

Next, an example of the effect related to the total number of prize balls won in the jackpot game state executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Here, FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a setting suggestion effect in a jackpot game state centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIGS. 28 (1a) to 28 (1d) show an example of a normally performed production of the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit. FIG. 28 (1a) shows the eighth hit from the first time, and the state in which the big hit game related to the 10R probability variation big hit in Special FIG. 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1a), the game has shifted to the 8th round, and since 74 game balls were won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the jackpot game, 1215 game balls were won in the jackpot game. The characters "1110/1500 get!" Indicating that the game has been acquired and that 1500 balls can be expected in the jackpot game are displayed below the number of rounds displayed in the upper center of the display screen. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the "eighth time" indicating the number of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "1380 pt", which is the total number of prize balls won in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the seventh time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1a), 2490 prize balls have been won since the start of the first big hit game.

After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, it means that 2010 prize balls have been won since the first big hit game started, and 2505 total prize balls with good sharpness. It can be said that the number has been won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of prize balls (2500) with a good sharpness is obtained in this way, as shown in FIG. 28 (1b), an effect image including the characters "2500pt get !!" (Sometimes referred to as a "number display image") is displayed in a large size in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to congratulate the player on winning the prize ball. In addition, when the total number of prize balls is counted as "2500 pt" in the process of counting up the display of the total number of prize balls after the jackpot game is completed, a drill number display image such as "Get 2500 pt !!" is displayed. It may be displayed.

FIG. 28 (1c) shows the 15th hit from the first time, and shows that the jackpot game related to the 10R probability variation jackpot in Special FIG. 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), the process has shifted to 4R, and since 32 game balls were won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the jackpot game, 480 game balls were acquired in the jackpot game. The characters "480/1500 get!" Indicating that there was a problem and that 1500 balls can be expected in the jackpot game are displayed below the number of rounds displayed in the upper center of the display screen. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the "15th time" indicating the number of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "4510pt", which is the total number of prize balls won in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the 14th time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), 4990 prize balls have been won since the start of the first big hit game.

After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, it means that 5005 prize balls have been won since the first big hit game started, and 5000 total winning prize balls with good sharpness. It can be said that the number has been won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a sharp prize ball number (for example, a prize ball number that is a multiple of 2500) is obtained in this way, as shown in FIG. 28 (1d), "5000 pt get! A large number display image including the characters "" is displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to congratulate the player on winning the prize ball. In addition, when the total number of prize balls is counted as "5000 pt" in the process of counting up the display of the total number of prize balls after the jackpot game is completed, a drill number display image such as "Get 5000 pt !!" is displayed. It may be displayed. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion using the drill number display image is performed according to the decision in the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process in step S715 of the first big hit suggestion effect selection process shown in FIG. Instead of the drill number display image shown in 1d), as shown in FIG. 28 (1d'), the setting suggestion may be made by changing the display mode of the character "5000". In this case, for example, since it indicates that the display mode of "5000" related to the setting 5 changes, it is suggested that the setting is 5 or more. The mode of setting suggestion is not limited to this, and other methods may be used. For example, the setting suggestion may be performed by the voice output or the light emitting mode of the lamp.

FIGS. 28 (2a) to 28 (2d) show an example of an effect in which setting suggestion is performed in relation to the display of the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit. Since the effects of FIGS. 28 (2a) to (2b) are the same as those of FIGS. 28 (1a) to (1b), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 (2c) is the ninth hit from the first time, and shows that the big hit game related to the 10R probability variation big hit in Special FIG. 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), the process has shifted to 2R, and since 11 game balls were won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the jackpot game, 165 game balls were acquired in the jackpot game. The characters "165/1500 get!" Indicating that there was a problem and that 1500 balls can be expected and required in the jackpot game are displayed below the number of rounds displayed in the upper center of the display screen. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the "9th time" indicating the number of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "4380 pt", which is the total number of prize balls won in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the eighth time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), 4545 prize balls have been won since the start of the first big hit game.

After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 4560 prize balls have been acquired since the first big hit game started. In the present embodiment, for example, FIG. 17 In the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process of step S715 in the first jackpot suggestion effect selection process, it is determined that the total number of prize balls won is 4560 and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Since it is not a multiple of 2500 shots, the drill number display image is not displayed, but the drill number display image including the characters "4560pt get !!" is displayed as a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the setting is high due to the discomfort that the drill number display image is displayed with the total number of prize balls other than the so-called drill number. The drill number display image as the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 28 (2d) suggests that the setting is 4 or more. When the drill number display image is displayed with the total number of prize balls other than the drill number to suggest the setting, the display mode is different from the normal drill number display image (for example, the number display mode is different). It may be easy to recognize that the setting suggestion is made as. The mode of setting suggestion is not limited to this, and other methods may be used. For example, the setting suggestion may be performed by the voice output or the light emitting mode of the lamp.

FIG. 29 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a continuous advance notice effect centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 29 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp. The 220 and the general drawing hold lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 29 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding numbers of special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 29A, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 that is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching. Has the same display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1. The same applies to the following description. In some cases, a look-ahead notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice) may be given by the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead.

In FIG. 29B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this production example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes is displayed in a misaligned manner, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

In FIG. 29 (d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" again, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this production example, the out-of-order display is continuously made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes, and the setting suggestion is suppressed from being continuously displayed, so that the player is set. It may be possible to recognize that continuous notice is being given instead of suggestion, and it may be possible to raise expectations for big hits.

In FIG. 29 (f), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, in FIG. 29 (g), the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

In FIG. 29 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. In FIG. 29 (i), , Has developed into SP reach (swordsman reach). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (i) to 29 (m) are performed, but since the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 21 (o) to 22 (y) are performed, detailed description is omitted. To do.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 29, the expectation for the big hit can be raised by performing the continuous advance notice production in which the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is continuously performed. You may be able to do it.

FIG. 30 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a setting suggestion effect in a decorative symbol variation display centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 30 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp. The 220 and the general drawing hold lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding numbers of special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 30A, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 that is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching. Has the same display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1. The same applies to the following description. In some cases, a look-ahead notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice) may be given by the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead.

In FIG. 30B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 30C, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this production example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes is displayed in a misaligned manner, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

In FIG. 30D, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 30E, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this production example, the out-of-order display in the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eyes is not continuous, and the player can recognize that the setting suggestion is made instead of the continuous notice, and expects that the setting is high. It may be possible to give a feeling.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a setting suggestion effect in a decorative symbol variation display centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIGS. 31 (1a) to 31 (1e) show an example of an effect of displaying the number of big hit start numbers, which is the number of symbol variation displays between big hits. In addition, the number of big hit start in this embodiment refers to the number of symbol variation display from the end of the electric support state which shifts after the end of a normal big hit to the next big hit. In addition, it may be the number of symbol variation display from the end of the normal jackpot to the next jackpot (that is, the number of symbol variation display in the electric support state may also be included).

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (1a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 31 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Region 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding numbers of special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 31 (1a), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the jackpot start number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the display of the number of starts between big hits is displayed as "244 rotations after the big hit", and after the end of the electric support state that shifts after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit, the special figure 1 and It shows that the symbol variation display of special figure 2 was performed 244 times. In the present embodiment, the jackpot start number display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

In FIG. 31 (1b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits is counted by 1, and the display is updated as "245 rotations after the big hit".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 31 (1d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the number of starts between big hits is counted by 1, and the display is updated as "246 rotations after big hit".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the jackpot start number display is displayed in this way. For example, the jackpot start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 31 (1e') to suggest the setting. May be done. That is, the mode of the numbers in the jackpot start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e') is different from the normal display, and in this production example, any of the even numbers (setting 2, setting 4 and setting 6). It suggests that it is. In this production example, the setting suggestion of the even number setting is produced, but for example, a combination of numbers suggesting the current setting (for example, when the display mode changes at 444 rotations, setting 4 or more is suggested. However, when the display mode is changed by 555 rotations, setting 5 or more is suggested), the setting suggestion of various modes can be performed by changing the display mode. It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the display of the number of starts between big hits, for example, the low setting tends to increase the number of symbol fluctuations between big hits, so the low setting is more likely to come out (for example, in the case of settings 2 and 3). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing a setting suggestion effect that denies the setting 1.

FIGS. 31 (2a) to 31 (2e) show the number of times the remaining symbol fluctuations are displayed in the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) that shifts after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. It shows an example.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the symbol is stopped and displayed for the special figure 1, while the symbol variation is being displayed for the special figure 2, and the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the corner, “x” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 to indicate that effect, but in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2, “x” is displayed. "-" Is displayed to indicate that the symbol variation is being displayed. In the electric support state, since the effect display is mainly performed with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the decorative symbol display device is performing the effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Absent.

Further, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 31 (2a) is the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Region 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding numbers of special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 31 (2a), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display number display in the electric support state is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol fluctuation display count display is displayed as "electric support remaining 8 times", and the remaining symbol fluctuation display count until the end of the electric support state is 8 times. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display number display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

In FIG. 31 (2b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the remaining symbol change display number display is decremented by 1 and the display is updated as "electric support remaining 7 times".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. By the time the symbol variation display is completed, two game balls have entered the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231. Therefore, the number of reserved special figures 1 is 4.

In FIG. 31 (2d), the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icons h0 are set, and the hold icons at the display positions of the second to fourth hold icons h12 to h14 are the first to third hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1, respectively. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuations is decremented by 1, and the display is updated as "electric support 6 times remaining".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display number display is displayed in this way. For example, the remaining symbol variation display number display shown in FIG. 31 (2e) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 31 (2e'). You may try to suggest the setting. That is, the mode of the numbers in the remaining symbol variation display number display shown in FIG. 31 (2e') is different from the normal display, and this effect example suggests that the setting is 6. In this effect example, the setting suggestion of the setting 6 is produced, but for example, a number suggesting the current setting (for example, when the display mode changes with the remaining 45 rotations, the setting 4 or 5 is suggested. However, when the display mode changes with the remaining 44 rotations, setting 4 or more is suggested), the setting suggestion of various modes can be made by changing the display mode.

The mode of changing the display mode of the numbers is not limited to the above, and for example, the display mode may be changed by changing the color, size, and shape of the numbers, or a character is added and displayed. It may be possible to suggest the setting by doing so. Further, for example, when the display of "electric support remaining 6 times" is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the display of the remaining symbol variation display number. Further, for example, when the display of "246 rotations after the big hit" is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the display of the number of starts between big hits. Further, the jackpot start number display and the remaining symbol variation display number display may be displayed only for a good number of times such as "10". In this case, for example, a specific number other than the good number of times is displayed. The setting may be suggested by displaying the number of times (for example, "66").

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the symbol variation display number and the display mode of the remaining symbol variation display number of the electric support are changed to suggest the setting. For example, a series of hits (big hit, small hit) Even if the setting is suggested by performing the effect when the number of times is a specific number of times (for example, every 5 times) is performed when the number of times is different from the specific number of times (for example, the 4th time). Good. Further, assuming that a specific effect is executed at a specific number of times (for example, every 5 times), a setting suggestion may be made by performing an effect different from the specific effect. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect example in which the setting suggestion is performed by the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays of the electric support is shown. Good.

Next, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a setting suggestion effect centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 32 (A) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is completed in the normal game state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. In the present embodiment, normally, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of symbols according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed as stopped (for example, as shown in FIG. 32). , When the combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "417".) In the production example shown in FIG. 32 (A), " For the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7", the mini symbol is "121", and it is denied that the settings are 1 and 2, that is, it is suggested that the settings are 3 or more. are doing. The display mode of the mini symbol is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, when the mini symbol different from the combination of the decorative symbols is "456", it may be suggested that the setting is 4 or more. Good. In addition, the high setting may be suggested by the frequency at which the combination of decorative symbols and the result of the mini symbol do not match.

FIG. 32B shows another production example of setting suggestion by the mini symbol. In this production example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", while the mini symbol is stopped and displayed by "1-1-panda". For example, it shows that a setting suggestion that denies setting 1 is being performed. In addition, when "panda" appears in the mini symbol, it may be used as a high setting confirmed symbol such as setting 6 is confirmed, or it may be used as a symbol suggesting that the setting has been changed. You may.

FIGS. 32 (C-1) to 32 (C-2) show an example of an effect when an over prize is won in a small hit game. That is, in the small hit game in the present embodiment, the small hit game ends when 10 game balls win the second variable winning opening 235a, but the game balls enter from the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a. It may take some time to pass the winning count switch SW1. Therefore, a prize of more than 10 game balls (so-called over prize) may occur in the second variable prize opening 235a. In the present embodiment, when an over prize is generated in the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2), 165 prize balls are generated because 11 game balls are won, and 165 prize balls are generated. "165/150 get!", Which indicates the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won in the small hit game, is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Further, in the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs, a predetermined over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the number of prize balls for the over-winning may not be displayed. Further, the over winning sound may not be output.

In the present embodiment, setting suggestion may be given when an over-winning occurs. For example, instead of the normal over-winning sound (audio output of "picone") shown in FIG. 32 (C-2), as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2') and FIG. 32 (C-2''). In some cases, an over-winning sound including setting suggestions may be output. In the production example shown in FIG. 32 (C-2'), the normal over-winning sound is used as another over-winning sound to suggest that the setting is high. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 32 (C-2''), it is suggested that the setting is 4 or more by outputting, for example, a voice "Shigoro ~" instead of the normal over winning sound. There is. In the present embodiment, as the suggestion effect performed at the time of over-winning, the setting suggestion effect is performed by voice output, but for example, a high setting suggestion may be performed by displaying an image or changing the light emission pattern of the lamp. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect when the over prize is won in the small hit game state is shown, but the setting suggestion effect may be performed when the over prize is won in the big hit game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the effect of suggesting the setting by the over winning sound is shown. For example, the opening sound of the variable winning opening output at the start of the round and the winning sound output at the time of winning the variable winning opening. For example, a sound different from the usual one may be output to suggest the setting.

In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and when shifting to a certain effect mode among the plurality of effect modes, a specific condition (for example, when the next symbol variation display in which SP reach is performed is started) Etc.) may be established, and the setting may be suggested by shifting to a certain effect mode at a timing different from a specific condition. In addition, there is a case where the mode is shifted to the look-ahead mode in which a specific reach effect is finally announced, and in this case, the setting suggestion is made by shifting to the look-ahead mode even though the specific reach effect is not performed. You may do it. Further, in a pachinko machine that produces a big hit by displaying a combination of decorative symbols of a big hit on one of a plurality of effective lines, a specific effective line (for example, a center line) The combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be displayed to suggest the setting. In addition, an effect (tutorial effect) explaining when the setting suggestion is performed may or may not be performed. Further, the timing at which the setting suggestion is made may be notified at all times, or may be notified when the timing at which the setting suggestion is given is approaching.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pause effect centered on a decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 33 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp. The 220 and the general drawing hold lamp 216 are not shown.

FIG. 33A shows a state in which the 49th symbol variation display is performed in the electric support state shifted after the end of the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot. In a simultaneous variable machine such as the present embodiment in which both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed at the same time, the remaining number of fluctuations of the electric support state at the start of the symbol variation display is Be decremented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric support state ends with the start of the 50th symbol variation display after the electric support state, and the game shifts to the normal game state. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), after the end of the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot, the final symbol variation display in the electric support state is displayed. Therefore, in the lower right part of the display screen, the characters "Den Support Last" are displayed to notify the fact. At the timing shown in FIG. 33A, both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed at the same time. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time, which is a small hit, is 580 seconds.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 (a) is an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric support state, although the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 33A, four hold icons h11 to h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and all of these four hold icons h11 to h14 of special figure 1 are displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 is the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is awarded a prize. This is to make the variable display of Special Figure 1 more executed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (b) shows a state when the 49th symbol variation display is completed by combining the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 after the end of the normal jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the present embodiment, after the end of the normal jackpot game, the electric support state continues until the symbol variation display of the special figures 1 and 2 starts 50 times. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), the special figure 1 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative symbol is also a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "417" in accordance with this. In addition, the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation which is a small hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c), it is shown that the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot is completed and the 50th symbol variation display is started in the special figure 1. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (c), the symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 2, and there are four pending symbol variation displays (that is, hold 4). Further, in the special figure 1, there are three symbol variation displays held (that is, hold 3). Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), when the 50th symbol variation display starts and the electric support state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, when the player hits right, the player hits left. It becomes more disadvantageous than. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "right-handed" display displayed in the upper right part of the display screen disappears, and a left-handed suggestion "Please return to left-handed!" Notification is performed. In addition, the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation which is a small hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), it is shown that the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot is completed, the 51st symbol variation display is completed in the special figure 1, and the result of the deviation is displayed. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), the stop display is performed by the combination of the outlier symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "541" in accordance with this. In addition, the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation which is a small hit.

In FIG. 33 (e), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation which is a small hit.

FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is subsequently performed a plurality of times and the result of a certain symbol variation display is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (f), the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 8-decoration 0-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 is three and the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 2 is four, there are three in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1. The hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (f), the symbol variation display, which is still a small hit, is continuously performed in the special figure 2.

In FIG. 33 (g), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display, which is still a small hit, is continuously performed.

FIG. 33 (h) shows the transition to SP reach after reaching reach. In addition, the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation which is a small hit.

At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (i), it is shown that the symbol variation display, which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds in Special Figure 2, is completed and the result of the small hit (for example, “Special Figure f”) is derived. ing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, substantially. The display of the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is postponed by the amount of interruption. However, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even while the small hit game is being performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is continuously progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (j), it is shown that the character of the lord is defeated by the character of the swordsman and is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". Then, when the small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 33 (k), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the special figure 2 is started, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted. To. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in order to return to the default background image from the SP reach, all are temporarily displayed except for the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol. It is shown that it becomes.

After that, when the arrival of the initial symbol variation time (for example, 90 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, as shown in FIG. 33 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Then, when the initial symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (m) displays the characters "Wait a minute" together with the characters of the plurality of child pandas. The normal production of the panda (normal production of the panda 1) is performed. The normal effect while the child panda character appears is an effect that is executed when "special figure f" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 during the symbol variation display of special figure 1. The content of the pause effect is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the result of the deviation is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "decoration 4". -Decoration 3-The combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "434" in accordance with this, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 is two and the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 2 is three, there are two in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1. The hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (n), the symbol variation display is still continuously performed in the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when "special figure f" is displayed in special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the content shown in FIG. 33 (m) is interleaved, but for example, special figure 2 When another small hit result (for example, "special figure g") is displayed in FIG. 2 and the small hit is obtained, FIG. 33 (m') is used instead of the pause effect shown in FIG. 33 (m). ) May be performed while the pause effect (the pause effect normal effect 2) is performed. In addition, in the case of a small hit, the same content may be performed regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this production example, when a small hit occurs in special figure 2 in the symbol variation display of special figure 1 in which SP reach is performed, for example, a special pause effect for SP reach is performed as a pause effect. However, the stage change effect in which the background image changes may be performed together with the pause effect, or after the pause effect is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an example of a pre-reading advance notice effect that may be performed when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-reading advance notice effect centered on the decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 34 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp. The 220 and the general drawing hold lamp 216 are not shown.

FIG. 34A shows a state in which the 50th symbol variation display is performed in the electric support state shifted after the end of the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot. That is, it is the last symbol variation display in the electric support state after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. Therefore, in the lower right part of the display screen, the characters "Den Support Last" are displayed to notify the fact. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously displaying the symbol variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a) is shown. In, both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed at the same time. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time, which is a small hit, is 580 seconds.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 34A is an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric support state, although the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 34A, four hold icons h11 to h14 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and all of these four hold icons h11 to h14 of special figure 1 are displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 that is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching. Has the same display mode as the other hold icons h11, h12, and h14 of Special Figure 1 (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. In some cases, a look-ahead notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice) may be given by the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead. It should be noted that FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (e) except that the third hold of the special figure 1 is the target of pre-reading. , The description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (f), the symbol variation display, which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds in the special figure 2, is completed, and the result of the small hit (for example, "special symbol g") is derived. The situation is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period from the occurrence of the small hit to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, and the special figure is substantially. The display of the result of the symbol variation display of 1 is postponed by the amount of interruption. However, even if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even while the small hit game is being performed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (h), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the special figure 2 is started, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted. To.

After that, when the arrival of the initial symbol fluctuation time (for example, 9 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol> right decorative symbol> middle decorative symbol, and as a result, FIG. 34 (i) ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking variation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1". Then, in this production example, when the initial symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (j) displays the shoji on the entire display screen and opens the shoji. Along with the appearance of the GLG character, who smokes cigarettes, the word "heat" is displayed, indicating that a look-ahead notice using a shoji screen is being performed. During this period, the execution time of the pre-reading advance notice effect corresponds to the period from the small hit to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit (that is, the period during which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted). .. It should be noted that the execution time of the above-mentioned pause effect (intermittent look-ahead advance notice effect) does not necessarily have to coincide with the period during which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 does not necessarily match. Any time may be set as long as it corresponds to the period of interruption. In addition, the execution time of the pause effect (intermitte look-ahead notice effect) is always performed for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds, etc.) regardless of the period during which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted. May be good. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 34 (k), the result of the deviation is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "decoration 4". -Decoration 5-The combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed on "451" in accordance with this, and the display result of the outliers is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 is two and the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 2 is three, there are two in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1. The hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (k), the symbol variation display is still continuously performed in the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when "special figure g" is displayed in special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the pre-reading notice effect is performed with the content shown in FIG. 34 (j), for example. , When another small hit result (for example, "special figure f") is displayed in the special figure 2 and the small hit is obtained, the content is different from the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j). The pre-reading notice effect may be performed, and for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (j'), the Sabohani group may appear as the pre-reading notice effect. Further, in the case of a small hit, the effect of the same content may be executed regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this case, for example, the color of a certain character or character may be different depending on the type of small hit. Further, the reliability of the pre-reading notice executed may differ depending on the type of small hit. Further, the reliability of the look-ahead notice may differ depending on the type of small hit and the content of the look-ahead notice to be executed.

In FIG. 34 (l), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display is still being performed continuously.

After that, in FIG. 34 (m), the decorative symbols of "decoration 4" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (n), the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Will be done. At this time, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is erased, and only the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbol, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (o), the decorative design starts to change again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-", which are a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit and are determined to shift to a probabilistic state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols did not change from the combination of the jackpots of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", and it is shown that the re-lottery effect failed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (q), the display is stopped by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4". Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 34 (q) is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 34 (q), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (r), as a jackpot game start effect, the characters "Challenge jackpot" are displayed together with the background image celebrating the jackpot (omitted here), and the characters "Right hit!" Are displayed. I'm urging you to hit right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. When the target of the above exists and the pre-reading notice is given based on this, the pre-reading notice is given by the delay effect, so that the player can enjoy the time until the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation for. In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is performed while it is shown in FIG. 34, it may be a big hit or it may be off. Further, in this effect example, the effect example in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the progress is interrupted due to the small hit of the special figure 2 is out of the way is shown, but the special figure 2 is a small hit. When the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the progress is interrupted is a big hit, the pre-reading notice effect is not performed in a short time, that is, after the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the special Until the final display of FIG. 1, the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the result of the special figure 1 in the symbol variation display becomes a big hit, a pause effect is produced. After the swaying fluctuation starts, the swaying fluctuation is continued until the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped and displayed, but the swaying fluctuation is not executed. The production) may be executed. Further, in this production example, for example, a continuous notice as a look-ahead notice effect that continues a plurality of times and a look-ahead mode as a look-ahead notice effect that continues a plurality of times are started to be executed before the look-ahead notice effect. During the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed in an overlapping manner.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (h), when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in which the special figure 2 is a big hit in the normal gaming state. An example of the production will be described.

FIG. 35 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a special figure 2 hold lamp. The 220 and the general drawing hold lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35 (a), the special figure 1 is in the stopped display state, but the special figure 2 is in the symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 to indicate that fact, and the symbol changing display area of special figure 2 indicates that the symbol change is being displayed. "-" Is displayed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding numbers of special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), it is parallel to the symbol variation display on the special figure 2 display device 214 as shown in FIG. 35 (c). Then, the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (d), the decorative symbol being displayed in the variation is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. The text "Preparing for a big hit !!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen to announce that it is a display. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the symbol variation time of the special figure 2 is as long as about 10 minutes, and therefore, the player can include the symbol variation display which is a big hit in the special figure 2. In some cases, the player may stop playing the game without noticing this, which may be disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, in order not to inflict a disadvantage on the player in this way, for example, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit, It is designed to notify that the result of the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is a big hit. Further, by configuring in this way, wasteful hitting may be prevented. Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed for a moment and then the display of "preparing for big hit !!" is displayed, the variable display is once performed with the large decorative symbol and then the big hit is being prepared. May be able to surprise the player. In addition, "Preparing for big hit !!" may be displayed without starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, it is possible to make the illusion that it was a continuation of the previous fluctuation and make it feel like you have gained one hold by making preparations with a large decorative pattern without displaying the fluctuation once. You may be able to do it. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (d), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and one hold icon h11 is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the off symbol (“special figure C”), and the decorative symbol is also displayed in accordance with this, “special figure 3-special figure 4-”. The stop display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Special Figure 1". In addition, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed at "341" according to the decorative symbol displayed as a stop. In addition, the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is still continuing, and the display of the characters "Preparing for big hit !!" is still continuing.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (f), the reserved symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, the decorative symbol also starts the variable display in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is still continuing, and the display of the characters "Preparing for big hit !!" is still continuing. Therefore, it may be possible to make it appear that a look-ahead notice (continuous notice) is being performed.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (g), it is shown that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, "special figure b"). In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. At this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and the symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier. In line with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and also stops and displays the mini-design at "417" accordingly. There is. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (h), the characters "Challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed, and the player right-handed. The game ball is urged to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot game starts.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is discarded at that time, and the missing symbol is displayed. It will be displayed. If there is a symbol variation display reserved in Special Figure 1, it will be sequentially digested after the big hit game related to the big hit in Special Figure 2 is completed. Similarly, when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the result of the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is discarded when the big hit is made in the special figure 1, and the missing symbol is lost. Will be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of applying to a simultaneous variable machine has been described, but it can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines, for example, it can be applied to a type 1 type 2 type mixer.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 (1a) to 36 (1h), an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the probabilistic state will be described. In addition, also in FIG. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

FIG. 36 (1a) shows how the symbol variation display is performed in the probability variation state. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously displaying the symbol variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pachinko machine 100 is the same as the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Both of the symbol variation displays of Special Figure 2 are performed in parallel. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1a), the character "small hit RUSH in" indicating that the small hit is in RUSH (that is, in the probabilistic state) is displayed as "0480 pt". It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. In addition, a mini-design and a right-handed display instructing right-handed are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (1a) is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probabilistic state, the holding icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 36 (1a), three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, and the hold icons h21, h22, of these three special figures 1 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 36 (1a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), the special figure 2 starting port 232 is used to win a special figure. This is to execute many variable displays of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1b), it is shown that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an off-line symbol (“special figure C”). Along with this, in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “x” indicating that the symbol has been stopped and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still continued, and the decorative symbol is also variablely displayed in accordance with the symbol variation display in the special figure 2.

After that, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. There is. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1d), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1d), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also the “decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8”. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of out-of-order decorative patterns. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is still continuing.

After that, after one of the reserved symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1e), above the decorative symbol being displayed. The characters "Big hit is approaching !!" are displayed, and a notice of a big hit is given in Special Figure 1. As a result, the player can recognize that it will be a big hit, further raise the expectation for the big hit, and may be able to prevent wasteful hitting. It should be noted that the display mode of the decorative symbol during the variable display may be changed to give a notice of the big hit of the special figure 1. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (1f), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is moved to the upper right corner of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size, while the characters "Big hit is approaching !!" are enlarged and displayed.

After that, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1 g), it is shown that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol (for example, "special figure B"). In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. Further, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is discarded, and the symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier. In line with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4", and also stops and displays the mini symbol at "034" in accordance with this. There is. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1h), the characters "Challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed, and the player right-handed. The game ball is urged to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot game starts.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is discarded at that time, and the missing symbol is displayed. It will be displayed. If there is a symbol variation display held in Special Figure 2, it will be sequentially digested after the big hit game related to the big hit in Special Figure 1 is completed. Similarly, when a big hit is made in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the result of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is discarded when the big hit is made in the special figure 2, and the missing symbol is lost. Will be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 (2a) to 36 (2e), an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state will be described. In this production example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not held and the symbol variation display is not performed. As shown in FIG. 36 (2a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a state in which the symbol variation display is not performed. It is a standby state display in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed.

FIG. 36 (2a) shows that only the special figure 1 displays the symbol variation in the probabilistic state. In the probabilistic state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, so that the effect display according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. Not done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2a), the character "small hit RUSH in" indicating that the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, in the probabilistic state) is displayed as "0480 pt". It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. In addition, a mini-design and a right-handed display instructing right-handed are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (2a) is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probabilistic state, the holding icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2a), since there is no reserved symbol variation display in the special figure 2, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed even in the variation icon display area 280. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), the special figure 2 starting port 232 is used to win a special figure. This is to execute many variable displays of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2b), it is shown that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an off-line symbol (“special figure C”). Along with this, in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “x” indicating that the symbol has been stopped and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display has not yet started, and the decorative symbol is also in a state of being stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4".

After that, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. There is. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In this production example, even after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, no notice display regarding the big hit is performed, but the notice display may be performed.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (2d), it is shown that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol (for example, “special figure B”). In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, since the symbol is still displayed in a stopped state, the decorative symbol is also in a state of being stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2e), the characters "challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved are displayed, but the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is not performed. , Right-handed hits may not have been performed, so in order to alert the player, the words "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed to encourage right-handed hits. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot game starts.

Next, an example of the effect when the small hits are held in a row in the probabilistic game state will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect relating to the display of the total number of winning prize balls centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), 35 small hits and big hits were generated including the first big hit, and the characters "35th" were displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chans is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in the probability variation state. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no pending symbol variation display. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the characters "in small hit RUSH" indicating that the state is in a probable change state are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and below the display screen. , "12215pt" is displayed as the total number of winning balls, and 12215 prize balls are won by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning openings (1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a). It is shown that

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1.

In FIG. 37A, four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h21, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. The first hold and the third hold are symbol variation displays that are small hits, and FIG. 37 (a) is the first symbol variation display that is a small hit for convenience of explanation. And the hold icons h21 and h23 of the third special figure 2 are shown by hatching, but in reality, they have the same display mode as the hold icons h22 and h24 of the other special figures 2 (round, unpatterned and white). Display mode). The same applies to the following description.

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), so by winning a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, This is to execute many variable displays in FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (b), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also the “decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8”. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (c), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is performed. In this embodiment, instead of displaying "small hit RUSH in progress", the characters "chance!" Are displayed to foretell that the hit (small hit or big hit) will occur. In addition, the characters "chance!" May not be displayed, the characters "chance!" May not be displayed, and "chance!" Is displayed during the small hit or big hit symbol variation display. The characters "" may be displayed without fail.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (d), the small hit symbol (“special symbol g”) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed accordingly. .. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "666" according to the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (e) shows that the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the characters "SMALL Bonus!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game disguised as a small hit game) is being performed. The number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is updated to "36th", and it is notified that it is the 36th consecutive chan. Further, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6" which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit is made is displayed, and it is notified that the hit combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. Has been done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (f), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 prize balls are acquired. , The characters "15/150 get!", Which indicates that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (g), it is shown that the small hit game is completed when 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 prize balls are acquired. At the same time, the characters "150/150 get!", Which indicates that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added. In addition, in this production example, a small hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display of special figure 2, and the characters "W-UP chance!" Foretelling this are overwritten with the characters "SMALL bonus!". It is displayed in a wrapped manner, notifying the player that a pending ream will occur.

After that, when the small hit game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state is continuing. The characters "Hit RUSH continue!" Are displayed, and the decorative design is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right part of the display screen to show that the variable display is started. In addition, in this production example, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not counted up but is highlighted and the count-up is displayed. Is informed that is reserved. That is, the total number of prize balls won before the small hit occurs is "12215pt". In addition, the character display of "W-UP chance!" Is continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game is not added to the small hit game, and if a pending consecutive chan occurs, after the small hit game is completed. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation for the pending ream chan. In the present embodiment, when the total number of prize balls won is not counted up, the display is reversed to notify the fact, but it may be displayed in another display mode. For example, a mosaic display may be performed to make it difficult to specify the current total number of prize balls.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (i) shows a state when the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the small hit game is completed. As shown in FIG. 37 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), "small hit RUSH continues!" Until the four symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed! By continuously displaying the characters "W-UP chance!" And continuously displaying the characters "W-UP chance!", The transition to the probabilistic state is smoothly made after the small hit game is completed. The production is done to make it look like. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the detachment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". The stop display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "8". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (j), it is shown that the small hit is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a small hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), in this production example, the decorative symbol that was displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen was displayed before all the symbol variation displays held during the small hit were digested. Move to the center and enlarge. At this time, the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner overlaps with the characters "W-UP chance!", But the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner may overlap with the character "W-UP chance!". .. In addition, the display of the total number of prize balls won is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (l), the small hit symbol (“special symbol g”) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed accordingly. .. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "888" according to the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred. That is, it is shown that a small hit pending ream chan has occurred.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (m) shows how the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the characters "SMALL Bonus!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the small hit game is being performed, and the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. The display is updated to "37th time", and it is notified that it is the 37th consecutive chan. Further, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 8", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit is made, is displayed, and it is notified that the hit combination of "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" is displayed. Has been done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (n), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 prize balls are acquired. It shows that 165 prize balls have been won in total with the number of prize balls won in the previous small hit, and that 300 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this small hit together with the previous small hit. The characters "165/300 get!" Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. That is, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls combined with the number of prize balls acquired at the time of the previous hit is notified. At this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (o), it is shown that the small hit game is completed when 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and are acquired at the time of the previous small hit. A total of 300 prize balls will be won in total, and the letters "300/300 get!" Indicates that 300 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, including the previous small hit. Is displayed at the top center of the display screen. Even at this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

After that, when the small hit game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 37 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probabilistic state is continuing. The characters "Hit RUSH continue!" Are displayed, and the decorative design is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right part of the display screen to show that the variable display is started. In addition, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen counts up, and it is shown that the 300 prize balls won in the two small hit games are added. Has been done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls acquired is not added and displayed after the first small hit game is completed, and the second small hit (that is, that is, , The number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game related to the pending consecutive change) is added together after the end of the small hit game. As a result, the player may be given the feeling of winning a large number of prize balls. After that, the total number of prize balls won was counted up as shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to 24 (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (q), 300 pieces were added to "12215 pt". "12515pt" to which the number of prize balls of is added is displayed.

In this production example, an example in which small hits are held in a row is shown, but for example, a large hit with a similar appearance such as a 3R probability variation big hit is also produced in a similar manner (for example, "W-UP". "Chance!" May be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be difficult to distinguish between a big hit and a small hit, and the game may be sharpened.

Next, an example of the effect when the big hit is held in a row after the small hit in the probabilistic game state will be described with reference to FIG. 38. It should be noted that FIG. 38 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect relating to the display of the total number of winning prize balls centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 38, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), 35 small hits and big hits were generated including the first big hit, and the characters "35th" were displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chans is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in the probability variation state. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no pending symbol variation display. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), the characters "in small hit RUSH" indicating that the state is in a probable change state are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and below the display screen. , "12215pt" is displayed as the total number of winning balls, and 12215 prize balls are won by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning openings (1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a). It is shown that

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1.

In FIG. 38A, four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h21, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. The first hold is a symbol variation display that is a small hit, and the third hold is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In FIG. 38 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first hold icon h21, which is a symbol variation display that is a small hit, is hatched, and the third hold icon h23, which is a symbol variation display that is a big hit, is hatched. Is shown by cross-hatching, but in reality, it has the same display mode as the other reserved icons h22 and h24 of FIG. 2 (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), so by winning a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, This is to execute many variable displays in FIG. Hereinafter, FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (f) are different from each other in that the reserved symbol variation display of the third special figure 2 is a big hit, but FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (f) are shown. ), So the description will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (g), it is shown that the small hit game is completed when 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 prize balls are acquired. At the same time, the characters "150/150 get!", Which indicates that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit, are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added. In addition, in this production example, a big hit is included in the reserved symbol variation display of Special Figure 2, and the characters "Big Bonus Super Heat!" That announces this are overwritten with the characters "SMALL Bonus!". It is displayed in a wrapped manner, notifying the player that a pending ream will occur.

After that, when the small hit game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state is continuing. The characters "Hit RUSH continue!" Are displayed, and the decorative design is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right part of the display screen to show that the variable display is started. In addition, in this production example, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not counted up but is highlighted and the count-up is displayed. Is informed that is reserved. That is, the total number of prize balls won before the small hit occurs is "12215pt". In addition, the text display of "Large bonus super heat!" Is continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game is not added to the small hit game, and if a pending consecutive chan occurs, after the small hit game is completed. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation for the pending ream chan.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (i) shows a state when the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed after the small hit game is completed. As shown in FIG. 38 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), "small hit RUSH continues!" Until the four symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed! By continuing to display the characters "" and also displaying the characters "Large bonus super heat!", The small hit game will be completed and the transition to the probable state will be smooth. We are producing a production that makes you look like you are. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the deviation, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". The stop display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "8". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (j), it is shown that the small hit is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), in this production example, the decorative symbol that was displayed small in the upper right part of the display screen was displayed before all the symbol variation displays held during the small hit were digested. It moves to the center and is enlarged and displayed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative design in the variable display overlaps with the characters "Large bonus super heat!", But the decorative design in the variable display overlaps with the characters "Large bonus super heat!" May be good. In addition, the display of the total number of prize balls won is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (l), the jackpot symbol (“special figure e”) is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, it is notified that the 10R probability variation jackpot of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is confirmed. The combination of decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "333" according to the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “◯” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. That is, it is shown that a big hit pending ream chan has occurred. Eventually, in FIG. 38 (m), as a big hit game start effect, a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here) and the characters "Big chance big hit" are displayed, and the series displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. The number of chans is updated to "37th", and it is notified that it is the 37th consecutive chan.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (n) shows that the first round of the game is being performed. In the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Congratulations on the big chance!" Along with the character of Mr. Machiko on the left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the 10R probability change big hit. .. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "decoration 3", which is a big hit decorative pattern when a big hit is made, is displayed. Further, in the upper center of the display screen, a display of "1R", which is the current number of rounds, is displayed as a round number display. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (n), two game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by opening the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 30 prize balls are acquired. In addition to showing that 180 prize balls have been won in total with the number of prize balls won in the previous small hit, it can be expected that 1650 prize balls will be won in this big hit together with the previous small hit. The characters "180/1650 get!" Are displayed below the number of rounds displayed. That is, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls combined with the number of prize balls acquired at the time of the previous hit is notified. At this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

FIG. 38 (o) shows that the 10th round is completed and the jackpot end effect is performed by 10 game balls entering the second variable winning opening 235a in the 10th round. Since the jackpot this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the characters "small hit RUSH continue!" Is displayed to indicate that the probability variation state continues. In the big hit game this time, 11 game balls entered the second variable winning opening 235a in a certain round (for example, the third round) to generate an over prize, and the previous small hit In addition to the total of 1665 prize balls obtained in the previous big hit, 1650 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in addition to the previous small hit of "1665/1650 get!" The characters are displayed at the top center of the display screen. In other words, since the number of prize balls generated by over-winning is also included, the number of prize balls actually won is displayed more than the number of prize balls expected to be won in the previous small hit and this big hit. Will be done. It should be noted that the number of prize balls generated by over-winning may not be included. Also at this point, the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not added.

After that, when the big hit game ends and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (p), the characters "small hit RUSH continue!" Continue on the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right part of the display screen to show that the variable display is started. In addition, the animation that the display of the total number of prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen counts up is started, and the 1665 prize balls acquired in the previous small hit game and this big hit game are added. The situation is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls acquired is not added and displayed after the first small hit game is completed, and the large hit 2 (2) that occurs after that is not added and displayed. That is, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game related to the pending consecutive chan big hit) is added together after the end of the small hit game. As a result, the player may be given the feeling of winning a large number of prize balls. After that, the total number of prize balls won was counted up as shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to 24 (p), and as a result, 1665 pieces were added to "12215 pt" as shown in FIG. 38 (q). "13880pt" to which the number of prize balls of is added is displayed. In this production example, since the number of prize balls to be added is as large as 1665, it is shown that the animation continues from the end of the big hit game to, for example, the execution of the ninth symbol variation display. There is. In this case, even if the hold of the four symbol variation display is exhausted, the decorative symbol may be continuously displayed in a small size in the upper right part of the display screen until the count-up of the total number of winning prize balls is completed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the total number of prize balls won is displayed for the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the previous hit (big hit / small hit). Instead of counting, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the later hit is combined and counted up after the end of the hit game related to the subsequent hit. In that case, if the next big hit is promised by the probability change, the number of prize balls won in the big hit game related to the previous probability change big hit is not counted in the display of the total number of prize balls won, and the later big hit is In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot is completed, the number of prize balls acquired may be collectively counted up on the display of the total number of prize balls won.

Further, in this production example, an example in which two consecutive chans occur in the hold has been described, but similarly, when there are three or more consecutive chans in the hold, the last hit in the hold consecutive chan (big hit). After the winning game related to (small hit) is completed, the number of prize balls acquired in these series of winning games may be collectively counted up in the display of the total number of winning prize balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the production example of the small hit holding ream chan and the production example of the big hit holding ream chan have been described in FIGS. 37 and 38, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbol and the small hit decorative symbol have been described. Since some of the combinations are common, for example, in the case of a big hit and a small hit, the effect on the display is performed in the same or similar manner, and which hit has occurred is identified. It may be difficult. Specifically, for example, the production in the case of a big hit can be made to look like a series of small hits in the manner shown in FIGS. 37 (l) to 37 (o), or the small hit can be obtained. In this case, it is also possible to make the effect as shown in FIGS. 38 (l) to 38 (n) so that the big hits (for example, the 3R probability variation big hits) appear to be continuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chans occur, the total number of winning prize balls is counted up collectively. For example, when a certain condition is satisfied, the reserved consecutive chans occur. In some cases, the total number of winning prize balls may be allowed to be counted up at once. For example, when a certain number of consecutive chans (for example, 10 consecutive chans) are performed, a pending consecutive chan occurs after that. In that case, the total number of winning prize balls may be counted up collectively, or the conditions can be set by the player, and when the set conditions are satisfied, the total number of winning prize balls is counted up. May be done collectively.

In the above description,
"A production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
When the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings is selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, the setting is made. It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing the change button 194],
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is an out ball detecting means [for example, an out ball detecting sensor SWout or the like].
The out-ball detecting means is a means for at least detecting a game ball that has entered an out-port [for example, out-port 240, etc.].
One of the plurality of effects is the first setting suggestion effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the character of the Gol grandfather who opens the shoji and smokes a cigarette with a balloon of "high setting!" GLG appears, and at least suggests to the player that the setting is high].
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a selected setting among the plurality of settings [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the shoji is opened and the "high setting!" The first setting suggestion effect in which the character GLG of the Gol grandfather who smokes cigarettes with a balloon appears is setting 4 or higher, etc.],
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect is started.
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detection means [for example, in step S501 of FIG. 15, the game ball passes through at least the out-ball detection sensor SWout. If the number of setting suggestion points (P) to be counted is 3000 or more and the lottery for executing suggestion effects is won, the conditions are satisfied, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the plurality of game ball detecting means may detect only that the game ball has passed, or may detect something other than that the game ball has passed. Further, the plurality of game ball detecting means may always detect that the game ball has passed, or may not detect that the game ball has passed.

Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probabilities are different. A setting other than any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings. Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probabilities are different. One of the settings may not be selected from the plurality of settings.

Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, any one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings different only in the jackpot probability, and when the setting change operation is accepted, the probability other than the jackpot probability is also included. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of different settings.

Further, only when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and at least when the setting change operation is not accepted. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.

Further, the out ball detecting means may detect only the game ball that has entered the out port, or may also detect a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the out port. Further, the out ball detecting means may always detect the game ball that has entered the out port, or may not detect the game ball that has entered the out port.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may suggest only the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or suggests the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may be. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may always suggest the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may not suggest the selected setting among the plurality of settings. There may be.

Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started, and when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started. May also be started. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, and the first setting suggestion effect is not started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. There may be cases.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, and the first setting suggestion effect may be started even when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied. The production may be started.

Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detecting means, or may be satisfied in relation to the result other than the detection result of the out-ball detecting means. It may be. Further, the first effect execution condition may always be satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detecting means, or may not be satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detecting means. There may be.

Further, "a control means [for example, a main control unit 300 or the like] capable of starting one of a plurality of gaming states is provided.
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state, the first setting suggestion effect may be started.
In the second gaming state, the first setting suggestion effect may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one of the plurality of gaming states, or may be capable of starting a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. There may be. Further, the control means may always start one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not start one of the plurality of gaming states.

Further, the control means may be capable of starting only the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and may also start gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. You may. Further, the control means may always start the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not start the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that is always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that may be more disadvantageous than the first gaming state.

Further, in the first game state, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started, or in the first game state, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started. May be good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the first game state.

In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the first game state. There may be.

Further, in the second gaming state, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started, or in the second game state, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started. May be good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the second game state.

In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the second game state. There may be.

In addition, "the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (4b), the first setting suggestion effect is made during the customer waiting demonstration effect. Execution of the production has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, or other than the first setting suggestion effect during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. The production may also be started. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. May be good.

In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, and the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period other than the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. The production may be started.

Further, "The game ball detecting means of one of the plurality of game ball detecting means is the first game ball detecting means.
The first game ball detecting means has a certain area [for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, a first special figure starting port (top) 230, and a first special drawing starting port. (Bottom) It is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered 231, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, the jackpot generation gate 252, etc.].
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is also satisfied in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detecting means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first game ball detecting means may detect only a game ball that has entered a certain area, or may also detect a game ball that has entered a region other than a certain area. May be good. Further, the first game ball detecting means may always detect a game ball that has entered a certain area, or may not detect a game ball that has entered a certain area. Good.

Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detecting means, or may be a result other than the detection result of the first game ball detecting means. May also be related. Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detecting means, or may be related to the detection result of the first game ball detecting means. It may not be established.

In addition, "when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the condition is satisfied. At that point, the first setting suggestion effect is being executed, etc.],
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (5c), although the condition is satisfied, the SP If it is in reach, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach ends],
The first timing and the second timing are different timings.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first effect is executed. An effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started at one timing. Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started at the first timing, and when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first effect is performed at the first timing. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or other than the case where the first effect execution condition is satisfied. In some cases, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing.

Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the second effect is executed. In some cases, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the timing of. Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started at the second timing, and when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first effect is performed at the second timing. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second effect execution condition is satisfied when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or other than the case where the first effect execution condition is satisfied. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing.

Further, the first timing and the second timing may be partially different timings, and the first timing and the second timing may be completely different timings.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, display of a group of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26 (1a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.].
In some cases, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are being executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (1a), the display of the Sabohani group and the first setting suggestion effect. And are done at the same time],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be started during the execution of an effect other than the certain effect. It may be one. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be one that is always started during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during the execution of a certain effect.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are being executed, and other than both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. In some cases, the effect of is also being executed. Further, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be executed without fail, and both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed. It may not be in the state.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, display of a group of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26 (2a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.].
The first effect execution condition is set during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period [for example, a period in which the jackpot end effect is executed]"). If it is established, the first setting suggestion effect is started after the certain period has elapsed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (2a) to 26 (2b), the jackpot end effect is executed. During the period, the first setting suggestion effect is not started, and after the jackpot end effect is finished, the first setting suggestion effect is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be started other than during the execution of a certain effect. There may be. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be one that is always started during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during the execution of a certain effect.

If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period (a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed), the first setting suggestion effect is performed after the certain period has elapsed. Only may be started, or if the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period elapses. Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started after the certain period elapses, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started after the certain period has elapsed.

Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only after the certain period elapses, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started even after the certain period has elapsed. Further, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period elapses, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. Even when the execution condition is not satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, display of a group of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26 (2a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.].
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied during the period when the second setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, the period when the jackpot end effect is executed], the first setting suggestion effect is performed. The production does not start,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be started during the execution of an effect other than the certain effect. It may be one. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be one that is always started during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during the execution of a certain effect.

Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, only the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting may be executed. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may not be started. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during the period when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the second setting suggestion effect is not always started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may be started.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during the period when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect may not be started even when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied during the period when the suggestion effect is executed. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied only during the period when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect does not have to be started, and the second setting is set. Even when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period other than the period in which the suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started.

Further, the present invention is provided with "achievement degree suggesting means [for example, display by the point gauge PTG shown in FIG. 25 (1a)] that at least suggests the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the achievement degree suggesting means may suggest only the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition, or may suggest other than the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition. Further, the achievement degree suggesting means may always suggest the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition, or may not suggest the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition. ..

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of performing a plurality of effects.
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
When the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings is selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, the setting is made. It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing the change button 194],
One of the plurality of effects is the first notification effect [for example, the drill number display image shown in FIG. 28 (1b)].
The first notification effect is an effect that includes at least notification about the game [for example, display of the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit].
The first notification effect is an effect that may include a suggestion regarding a selected setting among the plurality of settings [for example, the characters "4560pt get !!" shown in FIG. 28 (2d). It is suggested that the setting is 4 or more by displaying the image of the number of drilled characters including],
The first notification effect is an effect that may not include a suggestion regarding a selected setting among the plurality of settings [for example, the characters "2000pt get !!" shown in FIG. 28 (2b). The total number of prize balls won is conspicuous by displaying the image showing the number of drills including, but the setting is not suggested],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, the first notification effect may include a setting suggestion, and the first notification effect may be focused on.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be an effect that can be executed in addition to the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probabilities are different. A setting other than one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings. Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probabilities are different. One of the settings may not be selected from the plurality of settings.

Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities only, and when the setting change operation is accepted, the probabilities other than the jackpot probability may be selected. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of different settings. Further, only when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities, and at least when the setting change operation is not accepted. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.

Further, the first notification effect may include only notifications related to the game, or may include notifications other than the notifications related to the game. In addition, the first notification effect may always include notifications related to the game, or may not include notifications related to the game.

Further, the first notification effect may include only suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may include suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may also include things. Further, the first notification effect may always include suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may not include suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. There may be one.

Further, the first notification effect may be an effect that may not include only the suggestion about the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or other than the suggestion about the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may be a production that may not include the thing. In addition, the first notification effect may be an effect that does not always include a suggestion regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings, or a case where a suggestion regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings is included. There may be some production.

Further, "The first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in an identifiable manner that the suggestion regarding the setting is included [for example, the number display shown in FIG. 28 (2d). The image is displayed when the total number of prize balls won is 2000 or 3000, whereas the image is displayed when the total number of prize balls is not the number such as "4560pt get !!" By displaying it, it is possible to recognize that it is a setting suggestion, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in a mode in which it can be identified that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or the suggestion regarding the setting is included. It may be carried out in a mode other than the identifiable mode. Further, the first notification effect may always be executed in a mode in which it is possible to identify that a suggestion regarding the setting is included, or a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. It may not be executed in.

It should be noted that the first notification effect may not be able to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. Further, the first notification effect executed at the first timing may include a suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, in the first case [for example, when the total number of prize balls won is 2000], the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is started [for example, in FIG. 28 (1b). As shown, the number display image of "2000pt get !!" is displayed, etc.],
In the first case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started.
In the second case [for example, when the total number of prize balls won is 4560], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, in FIG. 28 (2d). As shown, a drill number display image including a setting suggestion of "4560pt get !!" is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations for the suggestion of the setting depending on the timing at which the first notification effect is executed.

Here, in the first case, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the first case, the effect other than the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. It may be started. Further, in the first case, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, or in the first case, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. There may be.

Further, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the first case, and the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in cases other than the first case. It may be started.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case, and the effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case. Does not have to be started. Further, in the first case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not always be started, and in the first case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is started. There may be cases.

Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started only in the first case, and the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started in cases other than the first case. The production does not have to be started.

Further, in the second case, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case, the effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. May also be started. Further, in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, and in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. May be good.

In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the second case, and the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in cases other than the second case. The production may be started. Further, in the second case, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, and in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. May be started.

Further, "In the second case, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary to start only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case, and the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case. Other effects may not be started. Further, in the second case, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may not always be started, and in the second case, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. It may be started.

Further, in the second case, the first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, and in the second case, the first suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting is not included. The notification effect does not have to be started. Further, it is not necessary to start the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion about the setting only in the second case, and the first that does not include the suggestion about the setting in cases other than the second case. It is not necessary that the notification effect of is started.

In addition, "certain conditions [for example, winning the execution lottery, being within a specific number of rotations (for example, 30 rotations) after the big hit, being a specific day of the week, conditions set by the player, etc." In the second case that has been established, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is started.
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied may be started, or the suggestion regarding the setting is included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. An effect other than the first notification effect may be started. Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be always started in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, and the suggestion regarding the setting is included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect may not be started.

Further, in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, and in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. The first notification effect including the above may be started. Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, and the setting may be started in a case other than the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect including the suggestion may be started.

Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, and even in the second case. If a certain condition is not satisfied, the effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not always be started, and even in the second case. If a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be started.

Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, and even in the second case. When a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started only when a certain condition is not satisfied, or even in the second case. It is not necessary to start the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting even in cases other than the case where the above condition is not satisfied.

In addition, "The first notification effect is at least an effect related to a big hit [for example, the total number of prize balls won, a re-lottery effect when a big hit occurs, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notification effect may be related only to the big hit, or may be related to other than the big hit. Further, the first notification effect may be related to the big hit or may not be related to the big hit.

Further, "In the first notification effect, a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings is made depending on the display mode of the numbers [for example, as shown in FIG. 28 (1d'), a drill number display image. Suggest settings by changing the display mode of numbers in
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the timing and direct use of numbers may give a sense of discomfort and draw attention to suggestions regarding settings.

Here, in the first notification effect, only suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be made depending on the number display mode, or in the first notification effect, a plurality of settings may be made depending on the number display mode. Suggestions other than those for the selected setting of the settings may be made. Further, in the first notification effect, suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may always be made depending on the number display mode, and in the first notification effect, a plurality of settings may be made depending on the number display mode. There may be no suggestion about the selected setting of.

Further, in the first notification effect, suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be made only by the display mode of the numbers, and in the first notification effect, other than the display mode of the numbers, Suggestions about the selected setting of the plurality of settings may be made. Further, only in the first notification effect, suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be made depending on the number display mode, and in the effects other than the first notification effect, the number display mode may be used. May provide suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings.

Further, "The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed differs depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings. [For example, the setting suggestion by the lottery number display image is shown in FIG. As shown in, the execution lottery is done based on the ball output number setting suggestion effect selection table provided for each setting],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, only the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different, or depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings. , The probability that the first notification effect including the setting suggestion is executed may be different. In addition, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting is executed may always differ depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, and the selected setting among the plurality of settings may cause the probability that the first notification effect is executed. There may be cases where the probabilities that the first notification effect including the setting suggestion is executed do not differ.

Also, depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may differ, and depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability is different. The probability that an effect other than the first notification effect that includes a suggestion regarding the setting is executed may also be different. Further, the probability that the first notification effect including only the suggestion about the setting is executed may differ depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, and depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings. The probability that the first notification effect including suggestions other than the suggestions regarding the setting is executed may be different.

Further, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may differ only depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, and the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be different. Depending on the setting, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may differ.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect [for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 27].
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which the result of the jackpot is once displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display is restarted, and then the jackpot result is displayed again [for example, FIG. 27 ( As shown in a) to the figure (d), the re-lottery effect is temporarily stopped by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1", and then the decorative symbols are changed and displayed again. Decorative 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 "may be changed to a combination of jackpot decorative patterns, etc.],
In the re-lottery effect, the result of the big hit suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state [for example, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.) after the big hit game ends] (hereinafter, "" First jackpot result [For example, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols suggesting that there is a possibility of a normal jackpot, such as "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". ] ”) Is displayed once, and then it becomes a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state [for example, a probabilistic state (for example, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state) after the end of the big hit game]. When displaying the result of the jackpot notifying that [for example, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols for notifying that the probability change is confirmed, such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"] (hereinafter, "the third case") ".)
In the re-lottery effect, after the first jackpot result [for example, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1"] is displayed once, the first jackpot result [for example, There is a case where "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" jackpot decoration pattern combination, etc.] is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "fourth case").
In the re-lottery effect, the first notification effect [for example, display of the effect display EF shown in FIG. 27 (c) and FIG. 27 (c'')] may be executed.
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include suggestions regarding the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), in the re-lottery effect, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1". The effect display EF displayed when the promotion is successful, such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", notifies that the design has been promoted, etc.],
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes suggestions regarding the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (c''), in the re-lottery effect, "decoration 1-decoration 1-". The effect display EF displayed when promotion fails, such as "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", includes a setting suggestion effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the re-lottery effect, after the third case (the first jackpot result (the result of the jackpot suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state) is displayed once, then from the first advantageous state. There may be only a case where the result of the big hit notifying that the second advantageous state is advantageous) is displayed, or there may be a case other than the third case in the re-lottery effect. Further, in the re-lottery effect, there may always be a third case, and in the re-lottery effect, there may be no third case.

Further, in the re-lottery effect, there may be only the fourth case (when the first jackpot result is displayed once and then the first jackpot result is displayed again), and in the re-lottery effect, the fourth case. There may be cases other than the case. Further, in the re-lottery effect, there may always be a fourth case, and in the re-lottery effect, there may be no fourth case.

Further, in the re-lottery effect, only the first notification effect may be executed, or in the re-lottery effect, an effect other than the first notification effect may be executed. Further, the first notification effect may always be executed in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may not be executed in the re-lottery effect. Further, the first notification effect may be executed only in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may be executed in the effect other than the re-lottery effect.

Further, the first notification effect executed in the third case does not have to include only the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the third case is other than the suggestion regarding the setting. The suggestion may not be included. Further, the first notification effect executed in the third case does not necessarily include the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the third case includes the suggestion regarding the setting. It may be possible.

Further, the first notification effect executed only in the third case may not include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in cases other than the third case may be set. It does not have to contain any suggestions regarding.

Further, the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may include only suggestions regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may include suggestions other than the suggestions regarding the setting. May also be included. Further, the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may always include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes a suggestion regarding the setting. It may not be available.

Further, the first notification effect executed only in the fourth case may include suggestions regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in cases other than the fourth case may be related to the setting. Suggestions may be included.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won [for example, displaying the total number of prize balls shown in FIG. 28, etc.].
The display of the total number of prize balls won is at least a display of the total number of prize balls won in the big hit game.
The first notification effect is an effect executed in the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won.
When the display of the total number of winning prize balls indicates that it is the first number [for example, 2000, etc.], the first notification effect [for example, FIG. 28 (1b)) does not include a suggestion regarding the setting. Display including the number display image such as "Get 2000pt !!"] has started.
When the display of the total number of winning prize balls indicates that it is a second number [for example, 4560 or the like], the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, FIG. 28]. Display including the number display image such as "4560pt get !!" shown in (2d)],
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls, or may be executed in the effect other than the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls. You may. Further, the first notification effect may be always executed in the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won, or may not be executed in the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won. ..

Further, when the display of the total number of prize balls won is the first number, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the display of the total number of prize balls won is the first. An effect other than the first notification effect, which does not include a suggestion regarding the setting when indicating that the number is, may be started. Further, when the display of the total number of prize balls won is the first number, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, and the display of the total number of prize balls won is the first. In some cases, the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting may not be started when indicating the number of.

Further, when the total number of prize balls displayed indicates that the number is the first, the first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total number of prize balls displayed is the first. In the case of indicating that the number is, the first notification effect that does not include any suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. Further, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only when the total number of prize balls displayed indicates that the number is the first, and the total number of prize balls displayed is the first. The first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting may be started even in cases other than the case of indicating that the number is.

In addition, when the total number of prize balls displayed indicates that it is the second number, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total number of prize balls displayed may be displayed. In some cases, an effect other than the first notification effect, which includes a suggestion regarding the setting when is indicated to be the second number, may be started. Further, when the display of the total number of prize balls won is the second number, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, and the display of the total number of prize balls won is the second. In some cases, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started when indicating that the number is a number.

In addition, when the total number of prize balls displayed indicates that it is the second number, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total number of prize balls displayed may be displayed. When is indicated to be the second number, the first notification effect including suggestions other than the suggestions regarding the setting may be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only when the total number of prize balls displayed indicates that it is the second number, and the total number of prize balls displayed may be displayed. In cases other than the case where indicates that is the second number, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started.

Further, the first number and the second number may be partly different numbers or all may be different numbers.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
Attackers that can win game balls [for example, 1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a, etc.]
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the normal gaming state, the first special feature. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the symbol variation display on the diagram display device 212],
The attacker can change its state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, the "special figure g" is A small hit game is executed in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes up to 12 times when the stop display is displayed and a small hit occurs],
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the second symbol according to the result of the second symbol variation display. In the case of a state (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the second case is between the start of the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 and the stop display. When the special figure display device 214 becomes a small hit at "special figure g" and the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes in a small hit game state, etc.] ".
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j)].
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (j), the pre-reading notice effect is "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration". 1 ”is performed during shaking fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts],
In the first case, the period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state [for example, the period from the start to the end of the small hit game as shown in FIG. 14 (b)]. (Hereinafter, "a certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the interruption period after the lapse of the original symbol fluctuation time (for example, the small hit in the special figure 2 and then the small hit" The first notice may be executed in the period until the end of the small hit game, etc.), etc.] ”).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notice means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the attacker may be one in which only the game ball can win a prize, or one other than the game ball may be able to win a prize. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins a prize, or one in which the game ball may not win a prize.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may determine only the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display, or may also determine the fluctuation time other than the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display. Good. Further, the fluctuation time determining means may always determine the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, or may not determine the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display. ..

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing notices other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a plurality of notices, or may not execute a plurality of notices.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time. It may not be done.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display. A display other than the display may be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display. May not be displayed.

Further, the attacker may be capable of changing the state only from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display, or depending on the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may be changed from the first state to a state other than the second state. Further, the attacker may always change its state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display, and the first attacker may change the state according to the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may not change from the state of 1 to the second state.

Further, in the second state, only the game ball may be easier to win the attacker than in the first state, and other than the game ball may be easier to win the attacker than in the first state. There may be. Further, in the second state, the game ball may be easier to win the attacker than in the first state, or the game ball may not be easier to win the attacker than in the first state. It may be.

Further, in the first case (in the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the first according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There may be only the case where the second state is reached), or there may be cases other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

The first notice may be executed only during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first notice may be always executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, only the first notice may be executed in a certain period (the period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state), or in the first case. , A notice other than the first notice may be executed in a certain period of time. Further, in the first case, the first notice may always be executed in a certain period, and in the first case, the first notice may not be executed in a certain period. ..

Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only for a certain period, and in the first case, the first notice may be executed even in a period other than a certain period. It may be executed. Further, only in the first case, the first notice may be executed in a certain period, and in cases other than the first case, the first notice may be executed in a certain period. It may be executed.

In addition, "the certain period is a period that starts after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a pre-reading notice effect is delayed. Is started at a timing after the timing when a small hit symbol such as "special figure g" is displayed in special figure 2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain period may be started only after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or from the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. May be started other than later. In addition, a certain period may always start after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. It may not be started later.

Further, "a control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300]] is provided.
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state is the first time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.].
The variation time of the second symbol variation display, which displays the result that at least the attacker changes state to the second state in the first gaming state, is the second variation time [for example, 580 seconds. Etc.]
The second fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is difficult to grasp the content of the decorative symbol variation display executed in connection with the variation of the first symbol variation display and determine the timing of the pre-reading notice, so the result of the decorative symbol variation display It may be possible to give the player expectations without disturbing by starting after the derivation of.

Here, the control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of gaming states, or can be controlled to a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. It may be anything. Further, the control means may always control to one of a plurality of gaming states, or may not control to one of a plurality of gaming states. May be good.

Further, the control means may be controllable only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or can be controlled in a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. May be good.

Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than the gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

Further, the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determination means in the first gaming state may be only the first fluctuation time or may be other than the first fluctuation time. .. Further, the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determination means in the first gaming state may always be the first fluctuation time or may not be the first fluctuation time. Good.

Further, the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display in which at least the result that the attacker changes to the second state in the first gaming state is displayed may be only the second fluctuation time. , It may be a fluctuation time other than the second fluctuation time. Further, the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display in which at least the result that the attacker changes to the second state in the first gaming state is displayed may always be the second fluctuation time. , It may not be the second fluctuation time.

Further, "In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the normal gaming state, the decoration symbol variation display is displayed. Corresponding to the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol, etc.],
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 35A, in the normal gaming state, the second special feature Corresponding to the symbol variation display in the diagram display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation display of the decorative symbol, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation display A display other than the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed corresponding to. Further, in the first game state, the decorative symbol variation display may be always displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display may be executed. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, other than the execution of the first symbol variation display. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of.

Further, in the first game state, only the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the execution of the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to display a display other than the decorative pattern variation display corresponding to. Further, in the first game state, the decorative symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the execution of the second symbol variation display is executed. The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed corresponding to.

Further, in the first game state, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed corresponding only to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the execution of the second symbol variation display may be executed. It is not necessary to display the decorative pattern variation display corresponding to the execution other than.

In addition, "In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is held when the attacker changes state to the second state, may be executed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (j), the pre-reading advance notice effect is suspended when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Pre-reading notice production, etc. for the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case, only the first notice targeting the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes to the second state may be executed. However, in the first case, even if a notice other than the first notice for the first symbol change display, which is held when the attacker changes to the second state, may be executed. Good. Further, in the first case, the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes to the second state may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. In some cases, the first notice for the first symbol variation display that is suspended when the attacker changes state to the second state may not be executed.

Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes to the second state. , In the first case, the first notice for the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display that is held when the attacker changes to the second state may be executed. May be good. In addition, only in the first case, the first notice targeting the first symbol change display that is suspended when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. , Even in cases other than the first case, even if the first notice targeting the first symbol change display that is suspended when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. Good.

In addition, "The first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol variation display being executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (j), the pre-reading notice effect is It is not a notice production regarding the symbol variation display of special figure 1 that was interrupted due to a small hit in special figure 2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notice may not be a notice regarding only the first symbol change display being executed, or may not be a notice regarding the symbol change display other than the first symbol change display being executed. Further, the first notice may not necessarily be a notice relating to the first symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to the first symbol variation display being executed.

In addition, "In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the period is After the end, the first symbol variation display resumes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (f) to (h), a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 and a small hit game related to the small hit. During the period in which is being executed, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed when the small hit game ends. Resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the display Only the first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted but the decorative symbol variation display continues. The symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display may be resumed after the period ends. Further, in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the first symbol variation display is displayed. One symbol variation display may be restarted without fail, and in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display continues. It may be displayed, and the first symbol variation display may not resume after the period ends.

Further, in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the display is performed only after the period ends. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display continues. It is displayed, and the first symbol variation display may be resumed even after the period has ended. Further, in the first case, only during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, even during a period other than the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is The display may be continued, and the first symbol variation display may be resumed after the period ends.

Further, only in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or even in cases other than the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted but the decorative symbol variation display is interrupted. Is continuously displayed, and the first symbol variation display may be resumed after the period ends.

In addition, "the notice of one of the plurality of notices is the second notice [for example, the big hit notice of special figure 2 in which the characters" Preparing for big hit !! "shown in FIG. 35 (d) are displayed]. And
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed.
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display that results in a big hit [for example, FIG. 35]. As shown in FIGS. (A) to (d), when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display which is a big hit on the second special symbol display device 214, The big hit notice of Special Figure 2 with the characters "Preparing for big hit !!" will start],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to urge the player to stop firing during a wasteful period in which the jackpot lottery is not held for a long period of time.

Here, the second notice may be related only to the second symbol variation display being executed, or may be related to the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display being executed. Good. Further, the second notice may always relate to the second symbol variation display being executed, or may not relate to the second symbol variation display being executed.

Further, the second notice may be started only when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit. It may be started in a case other than the case where the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which is the result of the big hit. Further, the second notice may be started whenever the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which is the result of the jackpot, or the result of the jackpot. If the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, it may not be started.

Further, the second notice may be started when the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display which is the result of the big hit. It may also be started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display which is the result of the big hit.

In addition, "the second notice may be executed over the first symbol variation display that is executed a plurality of times [for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (f), 2 A big hit notice of special figure 2 is given across the symbol change display of special figure 1 of the times],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make it look like a look-ahead notice.

Here, only the second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times may be executed. In some cases, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may always be executed across the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or the second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times. The notice may not be executed.

Further, the second notice may be executed over only the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or a symbol other than the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times. The second notice may be executed across the variable display.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states [for example, CPU 304 in the control unit 300] and
Attackers that can win game balls [for example, 1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The attacker can change its state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game [For example, in the second special figure display device 214, "special figure g" is stopped and displayed to be a small hit. In that case, a small hit game is executed in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes up to 12 times],
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is the total number of prize balls displayed [for example, the total number of prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 37 (a). Display, etc.]
The total prize ball number display is a display showing the total prize ball number obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous for the player including the second gaming state [for example,. The total number of prize balls won will be displayed from the first big hit to the normal big hit until the end of the electric support state that shifts after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit, etc.],
In the second gaming state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, after the second state is completed, the game ball to the attacker The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 24 (j) to 24 (p), acquired during the small hit game. The number of prize balls won is not counted in the display of the total number of prize balls won during the small hit game, but is counted up after the end of the small hit game, etc.],
In the second game state, when a certain condition [for example, hold ream chan, etc.] is satisfied, the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. Even in the case, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed, and then the attacker is used. Is in the second state and after the second state is completed, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker is added to the total number of prize balls displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 37 (e) to 37 (q), when the small hits are held in a row, the first small hit game related to the first small hit is completed. The number of prize balls won in the small hit game of is not added to the display of the total number of prize balls won even after the first small hit game is completed, and the small hit game related to the second small hit, which is a pending consecutive chan. After the end of, the number of prize balls won in the first small hit game and the second small hit game is added up and counted up to the total number of prize balls won, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of gaming states, or can be controlled to a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. It may be anything. Further, the control means may always control to one of a plurality of gaming states, or may not control to one of a plurality of gaming states. May be good.

In addition, the attacker may be able to win only the game ball, or may be able to win a prize other than the game ball. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins a prize, or one in which the game ball may not win a prize.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the attacker may be able to change the state only from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or the state other than the first state to the second state depending on the result of the game. It may also be changeable. In addition, the attacker may always change its state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or when the state does not change from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game. There may be.

Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball is easier to win only the attacker than the first state, or a state in which the game ball is easier to win other than the attacker than the first state. You may. In addition, the second state may be a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state, or the game ball may be more difficult to win the attacker than the first state. There may be.

Further, the control means may be controllable only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or can be controlled in a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. May be good.

Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which only the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state, or is more likely to be in the second state other than the attacker than in the first gaming state. It may be in a gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state, and the attacker is not more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state. It may be in a gaming state in some cases.

Also, in the second game state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed In some cases, the number of prize balls won may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even if a prize is won, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may be added to the display other than the total number of prize balls displayed after the second state is completed. Good. Also, in the second game state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends The number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, or when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker in the second game state. In addition, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and not displayed.

Also, in the second game state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed In some cases, only the number of prize balls won may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case of winning, the number of prize balls other than the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed after the second state is completed. May be good.

Also, in the second game state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, only the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. The corresponding number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even if a prize is won, the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes other than the number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed after the second state is completed. Good.

In addition, in the second game state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker only after the second state ends. The corresponding number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even if a prize is won, the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls won to the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed even when the second state is not completed. Good.

Also, in the second game state, only when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. The corresponding number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even in cases other than when a prize is won, the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed after the second state is completed. Good.

In addition, only in the second game state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. The corresponding number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed, or even in a game state other than the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and is 1 or more. When a game ball wins an attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed after the second state is completed. May be good.

Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, only the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is a certain value. If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball is won in the attacker. Other than adding the number of unadded prize balls according to the number to the total number of prize balls won may be added. Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is a certain value. If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball is won in the attacker. In some cases, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number is not added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added only to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is a certain value. If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball is won in the attacker. The number of unadded prize balls according to the number may be added to a display other than the total number of winning prize balls.

Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, only the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball is won in the attacker. The number of prize balls other than the number of unadded prize balls according to the number may be added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won only to the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game balls to other than the attacker The number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prizes may be added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

Further, in the second gaming state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. Only after this is done, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, there is If the conditions are met, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and even after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball to the attacker The number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prizes may be added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

Further, in the second game state, only when a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning games to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. After that, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker may be added to the total number of prize balls won, or in the second game state, a certain condition Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game to the attacker is completed after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and after the attacker is in the second state and the second state is completed, the game ball to the attacker The number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prizes won may be added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied only in the second gaming state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second After the state ends, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is not added to the total number of prize balls won, and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state After the end, the unadded prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed according to the number of game balls won in the attacker, or the game state other than the second game state may be added. Even in the case where a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the attacker is after the second state is completed. The number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the game is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends, and then the attacker The number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prizes won in the game ball may be added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed.

In addition, "The result of the game is the result of the symbol variation display.
The certain condition is that when the attacker shifts from the first state to the second state, the attacker is put into the second state as a result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. A condition that contains a result that will change state,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the certain condition is satisfied, the result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes state to the second state. At least a display that suggests that (hereinafter, "Holding Ren Chan Suggestion Display [For example," W-UP Chance! "Shown in Fig. 37 (g)" and "Large Bonus Super Heat!" Shown in Fig. 38 (g)! "Display, etc.]" is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if a certain condition is satisfied, the result of the pending continuous Chan suggestion display (the result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes state to the second state. Only the display (at least suggesting that the display is performed) may be displayed, or if a certain condition is satisfied, a display other than the pending ream suggestion display may be displayed. In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may always be displayed, and if a certain condition is satisfied, the reserved continuous chan suggestion display may not be displayed. There may be.

In addition, the hold consecutive chan suggestion display may be displayed only when a certain condition is satisfied, and the hold consecutive chan suggestion display may be displayed even when a certain condition is not satisfied. You may.

In addition, "The pending ream suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker ends the second state and starts the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 37 (g) to 37 (g). As shown in Fig. (H) and Fig. 38 (g) to Fig. (H), the display of "W-UP chance!" And the display of "Big bonus super heat!" Are small hit games. It continues to be displayed even after it ends and the symbol variation display starts],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make it appear that the next hit will come immediately by starting the symbol variation display while the hold ream suggestion display is displayed.

Here, the hold ream suggestion display may be continuously displayed only after the attacker has finished the second state and the symbol variation display has started, or the attacker has the second state. It may be continuously displayed other than after the end and the start of the symbol variation display. In addition, the hold ream suggestion display may be displayed continuously even after the attacker finishes the second state and the symbol variation display starts, or the attacker is in the second state. It may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display is started after the end.

In addition, "The second state is a state of both a big hit game state and a small hit game state.
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variation display.
The result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state may be the same [for example, shown in FIG. 6 (c)). As described above, the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 6-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" may be displayed in the case of a big hit, or in the case of a small hit. May also be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state may be the same, or the jackpot game state. The result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state may be the same as the result other than the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state. In addition, the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state may always be the same, or the shift to the jackpot game state. The result of the decorative symbol variation display to be performed may not be the same as the result of the decorative symbol variation display to shift to the small hit game state.

In addition, "a decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to see [for example, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 4), a second variable winning prize is obtained. The mouth 235a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, which is difficult for the player to see, etc.],
The operation mode of the attacker is different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make it difficult to identify the type of hit depending on the opening mode of the attacker.

Here, the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that only the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to see, or the decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker other than the operation mode of the attacker. The operation mode may also be difficult for the player to see. Further, the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to see, or the decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker and the operation mode of the attacker is the player. It may not be difficult to see.

Further, only the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to make it difficult for the player to see the operation mode of the attacker, or the members other than the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to operate the attacker. May be difficult for the player to see. Further, the decorative member may be arranged only on the front side of the attacker to make it difficult for the player to see the operation mode of the attacker, or the decorative member may be arranged other than the front side of the attacker to change the operation mode of the attacker. It may be difficult for the player to see.

Further, only the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and the mode other than the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state. Further, the operation mode of the attacker may always be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and the attacker operation mode may not be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

Further, the operation mode of the attacker may be different only in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and the operation mode of the attacker may be different in the game states other than the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

Further, "in the second gaming state, the decoration is performed in the first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen as shown in FIG. 37 (h)]. The symbol variation display may be displayed,
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the decorative symbol is displayed large in the central portion of the display screen as shown in FIG. 37 (a)]. May be displayed,
The size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode.
In the second gaming state, the period during which the symbol variation display that is held when the second state ends (hereinafter, "a certain period [for example, held when the small hit game ends]" The period until the four times of the symbol variation display is digested] ”), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but when the certain condition is satisfied. Is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display in the second display mode even during the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), it is held when the small hit game is completed. Of the symbol variation displays that are displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed large in the center of the display screen during execution of the symbol variation display that is a hit (small hit / big hit)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, for example, if the out-of-order part in the case of holding continuous chan is made inconspicuous, and the big hit symbol is suddenly displayed when it becomes a big hit, it can be made to look like a continuous chan immediately. There is.

Here, in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, and in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. The symbol variation display may be displayed. Further, in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed in the first display mode. There may be.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode only in the second gaming state, or the decorative symbol may be displayed in the first display mode even in a gaming state other than the second gaming state. A variable display may be displayed.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed. Further, in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may always be displayed in the second display mode, and in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode. There may be.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode only in the second gaming state, and the decorative symbol may be displayed in the second display mode even in a gaming state other than the second gaming state. A variable display may be displayed.

Further, the size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode alone, and the size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode. It may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the embodiment. Further, the size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode, and the size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode. It may not be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in.

Further, only the size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode, and the size other than the decorative symbol in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode. It may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period (the period during which the symbol variation display is held when the second state ends). However, if a certain condition is satisfied, only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period, or in the second gaming state, there is a certain condition. In the period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period. The display may also be displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period of time, the second is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may always be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. If so, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period of time, the second is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. If this is the case, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time, but only when a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period of time, the second is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. In cases other than the above, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time, but if only certain conditions are satisfied, even for a certain period of time, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time, but other than certain conditions. Even when the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, for a certain period, only the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, the display may be displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, a display other than the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed only in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode for a certain period of time. If the above conditions are satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode only for a certain period of time, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period of time. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode even during a period other than a certain period. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, only in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period. The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode for a certain period of time even in a gaming state other than the second gaming state. If a certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period of time.

Further, "Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prizes for the game ball to the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of prize balls corresponding to the above is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, the attacker then becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state. In the period from the end of the above state to the addition of the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prizes of the game balls to the attacker to the total number of prizes won, the total prizes won. Change the display mode of the number of balls display to another display mode [For example, as shown in FIGS. 37 (h) to (o), the prize obtained in the first small hit game for holding consecutive chans. While the addition of the total number of winning prize balls to the display is reserved, the display color of the total number of winning prize balls is highlighted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number is not added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed, the attacker goes to the attacker after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. In the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning games in the game is added to the total number of winning prize balls, the display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is changed to another display mode only. It may be changed, and even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. If the corresponding number of prize balls is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, after the second state ends, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. So, in the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of game balls won to Attacca is added to the total number of prize balls displayed, the display mode of the total number of prize balls is different. The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode. In addition, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. If the total number of winning prize balls is not added to the display, the attacker will be in the second state after the second state is completed, and after the second state is completed, the attacker will be charged. In the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning games is added to the total number of winning prize balls, the display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is always changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, it depends on the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. If the total number of prize balls won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. , The display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed differently in the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of winning prize balls. It may not be changed to the mode.

In addition, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. If the total number of winning prize balls is not added to the display, the attacker will be in the second state after the second state is completed, and after the second state is completed, the attacker will be charged. In the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning games is added to the total number of prize balls displayed, only the display mode of the total number of prize balls is changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, it depends on the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. If the total number of prize balls won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. , In the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of winning prize balls, the display mode other than the total number of winning prize balls is also displayed. It may be changed to another display mode.

In addition, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. If the total number of winning prize balls is not added to the display, the attacker will be in the second state after the second state is completed, and after the second state is completed, the attacker will be charged. The display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is changed to another display mode only until the number of prize balls that have not been added according to the number of winning games is added to the total number of winning prize balls. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, it depends on the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. If the total number of prize balls won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. , Display mode of the total number of prize balls displayed even during the period other than the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total number of prize balls displayed. May be changed to another display mode.

In addition, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. If the total number of winning prize balls is not added to the total number of winning balls, the attacker will only go to the attacker after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. The display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is changed to another display mode until the number of unadded prize balls is added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed according to the number of winning games. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, it depends on the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. If the total number of prize balls won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, except after the second state ends and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends. However, in the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of game balls won to Attacca is added to the total number of prize balls displayed, the display mode of the total number of prize balls is different. The display mode may be changed.

In addition, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state is completed. Only when the total number of winning prize balls is not added to the display, after the second state ends, the attacker becomes the second state, and after the second state ends, the attacker The display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is changed to another display mode until the number of unadded prize balls is added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed according to the number of winning games. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, it depends on the number of game balls won in the attacker after the second state ends. Even if the total number of prize balls won is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, the attacker will be in the second state after the end of the second state, and the second state will end. After that, the display mode of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed in the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of winning prize balls. It may be changed to another display mode.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
Attackers that can win game balls [for example, 1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a, etc.]
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A first control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means.
A second control means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500, etc.] capable of controlling at least the display means.
It is a game table equipped with
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
After the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure f", "special figure g", etc.] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, it is possible to shift to the small hit game state [for example, the second special figure]. When "special figure f" or "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the display device 214 and a small hit occurs, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes is executed, etc.],
When the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of execution of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determining means (hereinafter, "in a certain case [for example, [for example," As shown in FIG. 14B, the second special figure display device 214 makes a small hit with "special figure g" between the start of the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 and the stop display. Then, when the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes in a small hit game state, etc.] ".
In a certain case, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display is interrupted during the period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game state (hereinafter, "or". (For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the symbol in Special Figure 1 is the period from when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2 to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit. The progress of the fluctuation display will be interrupted (interrupted state), etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first notice display [for example, the display of the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j) and FIG. 35 (j')].
The first notice display may be displayed in connection with the certain state [for example, the display of the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed in connection with the interruption state, etc. ],
The second control means is a means for performing control in response to a command from the first control means.
A certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information and It is determined whether or not the first notice display is displayed in relation to the special figure stop type command, etc. [For example, when a small hit is made with "special figure g", it is shown in FIG. 34 (j). The display of the advance look-ahead notice is displayed, and when a small hit is made with "Special Figure f", the display of the advance notice look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 35 (j') is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. .. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may determine only the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display, or may also determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display other than the first symbol fluctuation display. May be good. Further, the fluctuation time determining means may always determine the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, or may not determine the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display. ..

The fluctuation time determining means may also determine the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display, or may also determine the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the first control means may be capable of controlling only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. The means may also be controllable. Further, the first control means may always control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the second control means may be one that can control only the display means, or may be one that can control means other than the display means. Further, the second control means may be one that always controls the display means, or may not control the display means.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time. It may not be done.

Further, it may be possible to shift only to the small hit game state after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to later shift to a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state. In addition, the small hit game state may always be entered after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol may be displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may not shift to the winning game state.

Further, it may be possible to shift to the small hit game state only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to shift to the small hit game state other than after.

In addition, there may be only a certain case (when the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means). However, there may be cases other than certain cases. In addition, there may or may not always be a case.

In addition, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display is interrupted in a certain state (in a certain case, from the start of the display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game state). It may be in a state) only, or it may be in a state other than a certain state. In addition, it may or may not be in a certain state.

Further, the display means may be able to display only the first notice display, or may be able to display a display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, only the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state. May be good. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may not be displayed in relation to a certain state.

In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a state other than a certain state. You may.

Further, the second control means may be one that performs only control according to a command from the first control means, or one that performs control other than control according to a command from the first control means. It may be. Further, the second control means may always perform control according to a command from the first control means, or may not perform control according to a command from the first control means. It may be a thing.

Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. May be determined, and other than the first notice display in connection with a command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. It may be determined whether or not the display of is also displayed. Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. May always be determined, and the first notice display in connection with a command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. May not be determined whether or not is displayed.

In addition, "at a certain time [for example, in FIG. 13 (b)" t21 after starting the display of "a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display [for example," special figure C "indicating the deviation]. The certain symbol is continuously displayed in the period until the symbol display time of special figure 1 which is the period of to t22 elapses.
After starting the display of the certain symbol [for example, "special figure C" indicating the loss] showing the result of the first symbol variation display, at the certain time [for example, t21-1 to FIG. 13 (b)]. Even if the small hit game state is reached in the period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1 which is the period of t22] elapses, the measurement for the certain time is not interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, for example, if the off time is extended, the disappointment will be emphasized, and the time until the start of the next symbol variation display will be longer, so it may not be possible to switch feelings. However, it may be possible to solve such a problem.

Further, according to this game table, since the symbol variation display can be started immediately after the end of the small hit game, it may be possible to entertain by shortening a certain time while the symbol is non-variable.

In addition, according to this game table, when a small hit occurs during the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is lengthened (that is, the ratio of the total during the change and stop display). It may be possible to entertain the player (because the proportion of the fluctuation is large).

Here, only a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. A symbol other than a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display of to the elapse of a certain time. In addition, a certain symbol may always be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be continuously displayed. In some cases, a certain symbol may not be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display until a certain time elapses.

Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed only during a period from the start of displaying the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be continuously displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed even in a period other than the period from the start of displaying the certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time.

Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be continuously displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display until a certain time elapses.

Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol showing only the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be continuously displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the symbol variation display until a certain time elapses.

In addition, even if a small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, only the measurement of a certain time is performed. Does not have to be interrupted, and even in the case of a small hit game state in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. , The measurement of the time other than a certain time does not have to be interrupted. Further, even if the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time is performed. It does not have to be interrupted without fail, and even in the case of a small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. , The measurement for a certain period of time may be interrupted.

In addition, the measurement for a certain period of time is interrupted only when the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. It may not be necessary, or even in cases other than the case where the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time. , The measurement for a certain period of time does not have to be interrupted.

Further, even if the small hit game state is reached only in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time is performed. Does not have to be interrupted, and is in the case of a small hit game state in a period other than the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time. Even if there is, the measurement for a certain period of time does not have to be interrupted.

In addition, even if a small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time is performed. Does not have to be interrupted, and is in the case of a small hit game state in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of a time other than a certain time. Even if there is, the measurement for a certain period of time does not have to be interrupted.

In addition, even if a small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of displaying only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time is performed. Does not have to be interrupted, and is in the case of a small hit game state in the period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. Even if there is, the measurement for a certain period of time does not have to be interrupted.

In addition, even if a small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol showing only the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time is performed. Does not have to be interrupted, and is a case where a small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. Even if there is, the measurement for a certain period of time does not have to be interrupted.

In addition, "the second control means has the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display by the certain command [for example, special symbol stop type command or the like] received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. It is a means that can identify which of the symbol variation display of the above is stopped and displayed first.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second control means may be able to specify only whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second by a certain command. It may be identifiable in addition to whether or not the result of the symbol variation display is a small hit. Further, the second control means may always specify whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second symbol variation by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not the display result is a small hit.

In addition, "the second control means displays the small hit symbol as a result of the second symbol variation display by the certain command [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information]. It is a means that can identify whether or not
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second control means may be able to specify only whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display by a certain command, or by a certain command. It may be identifiable in addition to whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. Further, the second control means may always specify whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display by a certain command, or the second control means may be specified by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the symbol variation display of.

In addition, "a plurality of types of the small hit symbols [for example," special figure g "in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times," special figure f "in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc." are displayed. It is possible
It is possible to shift to the small hit game state according to the type of the small hit symbol [For example, when a small hit is made in "special figure g", the small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times. If it shifts to the state and a small hit is made in "Special Figure f", it shifts to the small hit game state in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc.],
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the shifted small hit game state [For example, when a small hit is made with "special figure g", the wait-and-see look-ahead shown in FIG. 34 (j) is determined. When the notice display is displayed and a small hit is made with "Special Figure f", the display of the pre-reading notice effect is displayed while showing in FIG. 35 (j')],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to display only a plurality of types of small hit symbols, or it may be possible to display symbols other than a plurality of types of small hit symbols. Further, a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of small hit symbols may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to shift only to the small hit gaming state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or it may be possible to shift to the gaming state other than the small hit gaming state according to the type of the small hit symbol. .. Further, it may always shift to the small hit gaming state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or may not shift to the small hit gaming state according to the type of the small hit symbol.

Further, it may be possible to shift to the small hit gaming state according to only the type of the small hit symbol, or it may be possible to shift to the small hit gaming state according to something other than the type of the small hit symbol.

Further, only the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the shifted small hit game state, or other than the display mode of the first notice display depending on the type of the shifted small hit game state. The display mode of is may be determined. Further, the display mode of the first notice display may always be determined according to the type of the shifted small hit game state, and the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the shifted small hit game state. It may not be decided.

Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be determined only according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or the first notice display may be determined according to the type other than the transferred small hit game state. The display mode of is may be determined.

In addition, "The first notice display is a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started in a certain case. [For example, the display of the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j) is intended for the symbol variation display related to the first hold of Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notice display is, in some cases, only the display of the look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol change display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started. There may be, and in some cases, there may be a display other than the pre-reading notice display related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. May be good. In addition, the first notice display is, in some cases, a pre-reading notice display related to the information of the first symbol change display that is always held at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started. In some cases, the display may be a display other than the look-ahead notice display related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. There may be.

Further, the first notice display is a pre-reading notice display related to the information of the first symbol change display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started only in a certain case. It may be a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, even in cases other than a certain case. May be good.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is an effect display [for example, an effect display related to a variable display of a decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 33 (f) to 33 (n)].
The display of the effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), in the normal gaming state, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212. The decorative design is displayed in a variable manner according to the display],
Even when the certain state is reached, the effect display proceeds without interruption [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (i) to 33 (k), in the normal gaming state, a small hit is made in the special figure 2. Even during the period from the time until the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, the effect display related to the variable display of the decorative symbol is proceeding without interruption, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the display of the effect display may be started according to the start of the first symbol variation display, or the display other than the display of the effect display may be started according to the start of the first symbol variation display. It may be started. In addition, the display of the effect display may always be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or the display of the effect display may not be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, the display of the effect display may be started only when the first symbol variation display is started, or the display of the effect display may be started according to something other than the start of the first symbol variation display. It may be started.

Further, even when a certain state is reached, only the effect display may proceed without interruption, or even when a certain state is reached, the display other than the effect display may proceed without interruption. Further, even if a certain state is reached, the effect display may always proceed without interruption, or even if a certain state is reached, the effect display may not proceed without interruption.

Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption only when a certain state is reached, or the effect display may proceed without interruption even in cases other than the case where a certain state is reached. Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption even when only a certain state is reached, or the effect display may proceed without interruption even when a state other than a certain state is reached.

In addition, "the time from the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state to the start of displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display by the shaking variation, and the case where the certain state is not reached. The time from the start of the certain decorative symbol variation display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display by the shaking variation is the same [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), special features. The time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display according to FIG. 1 to the start of the shaking variation is the same regardless of whether or not a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2.],
When the certain decorative symbol variation display starts in the certain state, after the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), in the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, it is displayed as a shaking variation. As a display of the pause effect that is displayed after the operation, the display of the pause look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j) may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there is a time from the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a shaking variation, and a case where a certain state is not reached. Only the time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display due to the shaking variation may be the same, or a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state. The time from the start of to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display due to shaking fluctuation, and the time from the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display when a certain state does not occur to the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display The time other than the time until the result is started to be displayed due to fluctuation may be the same. In addition, the time from the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a shaking variation, and a certain decoration in a case where a certain state does not occur. The time from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display due to the shaking variation may always be the same, or a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state may occur. The time from the start to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display due to the shaking fluctuation, and the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display after the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display when a certain state does not occur. It may not be the same time until the display starts due to fluctuations in shaking.

In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display starts in a certain state, the period from displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display as a shaking variation until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, only the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display fluctuates. In the period from the display with to the stop display of the first symbol variation display, a display other than the first notice display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display starts in a certain state, the period from displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display as a shaking variation until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, the first notice display may always be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display as a shaking variation. , The first notice display may not be displayed in the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display starts in a certain state, the period from displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display as a shaking variation until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display fluctuates. The first notice display may be displayed even in a period other than the period from the display with to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display is started in a certain state, only after the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display fluctuates. In addition to after the display in, the first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, only when a certain decorative symbol variation display is started in a certain state, after the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, and even when a certain decorative symbol variation display is not started in a certain state, a certain decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in the period from the display of the result as the fluctuation variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display starts in a certain state only, the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display is started in a state other than a certain state, the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The first notice display may be displayed in the period from the display of the shaking variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "If the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then the first symbol variation display is displayed. In the period until the stop display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the change of the decorative symbol related to the design change display of the special figure 1 which is out of alignment. In the display, the display of the pause look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j) may be displayed as the display of the pause effect after being displayed due to the fluctuation of shaking],
When the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, the first notice display may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, an advanced player may understand that the first notice display is displayed so that the symbol variation display does not make a big hit.

In addition, according to this game console, when the first notice display is displayed during the execution of the continuous notice performed across a plurality of symbol change displays, the symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading is the symbol change display. Since it can be seen that there is no such thing, it may be possible to concentrate on the next symbol variation display or later.

Here, if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period up to, only the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. In the period from the display of the result of the above to the stop display of the first symbol variation display, a display other than the first notice display may be displayed. In addition, if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may always be displayed, and if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state results in a deviation, the result of the decorative symbol variation display fluctuates. The first notice display may not be displayed in the period from the display with to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. The first notice display may be displayed only during the period of, and when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state results in a deviation, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. The first notice display may be displayed even in a period other than the period from the display of the result as the fluctuation variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation. In the period up to, the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of deviation, the decorative symbol variation display In addition to after displaying the result as shaking fluctuation, the first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed, and the decorative symbol variation in a certain state may be displayed even if the result of the decorative symbol variation display is not the result of deviation. The first notice display may be displayed in the period from the display result of the display to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, it is not necessary that only the first notice display is displayed, and when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In the period from the display of the result as the shaking variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display, it is not necessary to display a display other than the first notice display. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display does not have to be displayed, and if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is shaken. The first notice display may be displayed in the period from the display of the variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. The first notice display may not be displayed only during the period of, and when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. It is not necessary that the first notice display is displayed even in a period other than the period from the display of the result as the fluctuation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation. In the period until the first notice is displayed, the first notice display may not be displayed, and if the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display It is not necessary that the first notice display is displayed in the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result of the above is displayed by the shaking fluctuation.

In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may not be displayed, and the decorative symbol variation in a certain state may not be the result of a big hit. It is not necessary that the first notice display is displayed in the period from the display result of the display as the fluctuation variation to the stop display of the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display always starts after the certain state is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b). , If the display of the pre-reading notice effect is displayed as the display of the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading notice effect will start after the suspension period has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display may always be started only after a certain state is reached, or when the first notice display is displayed. May be started even after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state. Further, when the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached, or when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started. , The display of the first notice display may not always start after a certain state is reached.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed, only the display of the first notice display may be started after a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started. , The display other than the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached.

Further, only when the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached, except when the first notice display is displayed. In the case of, the display of the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached.

Further, when only the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached, or a display other than the first notice display is also displayed. In that case, the display of the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is reached.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect display, etc.].
The second notice display is a notice display different from the first notice display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second notice display may be partly different from the first notice display, or may be entirely different notice display.

In addition, "The second notice display is a look-ahead notice display.
The second notice display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of times of the first symbol variation display [for example, the effect display in the look-ahead mode is displayed over a plurality of times of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Etc.],
The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the second notice display may be only the look-ahead notice display, may be a display other than the look-ahead notice display, and the second notice display may be a look-ahead notice display without fail. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may not be displayed.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only over the first symbol variation display a plurality of times, or may be displayed across the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display a plurality of times. It may be displayed as. Further, the second notice display may be displayed across the first symbol variation display a plurality of times without fail, or may not be displayed across the first symbol variation display a plurality of times. It may be one.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first notice display is displayed while the second notice display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display is also displayed while the second notice display is displayed. It may be. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed while the second notice display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed while the second notice display is displayed. Good.

In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only while the second notice display is displayed, and the first notice display may be displayed even while the display other than the second notice display is displayed. It may be done.

In addition, "when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed in the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, it is not necessary that only the first notice display is displayed in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display. Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not always be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Further, only when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state. The first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display even when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is not satisfied.

Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied only in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and other than a certain state. If the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied even in the above state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed even in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "It is possible to control to one of a plurality of gaming states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
At least the small hit symbol is displayed rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state [for example, 5 seconds, etc.]. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display [for example, 580 seconds] is longer.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to control only one of the plurality of gaming states, or it may be possible to control a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. You may. Further, it may be controlled to one of a plurality of gaming states without fail, or may not be controlled to one of a plurality of gaming states.

Further, the control means may be controllable only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or can be controlled in a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. May be good.

Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than the gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

Further, at least the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determination means in the first game state. Only the length may be longer, and at least the small hit symbol is displayed than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first gaming state. The length other than the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display may be longer. Further, at least the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display at which the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determination means in the first game state. The length may always be longer, and at least the small hit symbol is displayed than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first gaming state. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display may not be longer.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display in which only the small hit symbol is displayed rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determination means in the first game state. The length may be longer, and symbols other than the small hit symbol are displayed rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first gaming state. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display may be longer.

In addition, "In the small hit game state, right hit is more advantageous to the player than left hit [For example, as shown in FIG. 3A, right hit is more advantageous than left hit in the small hit game state. Is easier to win in the 2nd variable winning opening 235a],
In the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state, there is a certain amount after the small hit gaming state ends. During the period [for example, 30 seconds, etc.], the display prompting the player to hit left is not displayed [for example, as shown in 20 (a), in the normal game state, for 30 seconds after the small hit game is completed, Even if you hit right, a warning message to encourage left hit is not displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the small hit game state, only the right-handed player may be more advantageous than the left-handed player, and in the small-hit game state, the player other than the right-handed player may be more advantageous than the left-handed player. May be advantageous to. Further, in the small hit game state, right-handed hit may always be more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and in the small-hit game state, right-handed is not more advantageous to the player than left-handed. There may be.

Also, only in the small hit game state, right-handed may be more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and even in a game state other than the small-hit game, right-handed is better than left-handed. May be advantageous to.

Further, in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, in a certain period after the small hit game state ends, It is not necessary to display only the display prompting the player to hit left, or when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display in the first game state and the player shifts to the small hit game state, For a certain period after the end of the small hit game state, it is not necessary to display a display other than the display prompting the player to hit left. Further, in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, in a certain period after the small hit game state ends, It is not always necessary to display the display prompting the player to hit left, or if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display in the first game state and the player shifts to the small hit game state, For a certain period after the end of the small hit game state, a display prompting the player to strike left may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, only in a certain period after the small hit game state ends. , The display prompting the player to hit left may not be displayed, or in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the player shifts to the small hit gaming state, The display prompting the player to hit left may not be displayed even during a period other than a certain period after the end of the small hit game state.

Further, in the first game state, only when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, in a certain period after the small hit game state ends, It is not necessary to display the display prompting the player to hit left, or in the first game state, except when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the player shifts to the small hit game state. However, for a certain period after the end of the small hit game state, the display prompting the player to hit left may not be displayed.

In addition, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and shifts to the small hit game state only in the first game state, in a certain period after the small hit game state ends. , The display prompting the player to hit left may not be displayed, or even in a game state other than the first game state, the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state. If this is the case, the display prompting the player to strike left may not be displayed for a certain period after the end of the small hit game state.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Below, I will add what I have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
・ A pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of multiple settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Equipped with directing means ・ Equipped with multiple game ball detection means ・ At least with an execution opportunity related to the detection result of the out ball detection means A game table that may execute a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as "first setting suggestion effect").

(Appendix 2)
-Equipped with a control means capable of starting one of a plurality of gaming states-The first setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first gaming state (for example, the normal state) -The second gaming state A game table that may perform the first setting suggestion effect (for example, during a big hit or during electric support).

(Appendix 3)
-A game console that may execute the first setting suggestion effect during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed (during the demo or customization setting, when it is simply firing but the start prize is not won).

(Appendix 4)
-Equipped with other game ball detection means related to the starting port, general winning port, etc.-A game table that may execute the first setting suggestion effect in consideration of these detection results.

(Appendix 5)
-When the conditions for executing the first setting suggestion effect are satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed at the first timing (for example, immediately) after the conditions are satisfied. When the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect are satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect is performed at the second timing (for example, judging the next fluctuation, the condition of the effect content, etc.) after the condition is satisfied. In some cases ・ A game table where the first timing and the second timing are different.

(Appendix 6)
-A second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, the ending of a big hit game) can be executed.-A game table that may be executed in duplicate with the second setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix 7)
-A game table where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect overlap.

(Appendix 8)
-A game table where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect do not overlap.

(Appendix 9)
・ It is possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, the ending of the big hit game) ・ If the timing overlaps with the second setting suggestion effect, delay or execute the first setting suggestion effect Not a game table.

(Appendix 10)
-A game table equipped with a means of notifying the execution trigger of the first setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix 11)
-A pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of multiple settings with different jackpot probabilities-Equipped with a production means that can execute the first notification effect-The first notification means can at least execute notifications related to the game・ The first notification effect is a game console that may be executed including setting suggestions.

(Appendix 12)
-A game table in which it may be possible to identify whether or not the first notification effect is notified including setting suggestions.

In some cases, it may not be identifiable. The setting suggestion may be included in the first notification effect executed at the first timing below.

(Appendix 13)
-The first notification effect is executed at the first timing when the setting suggestion is not included.-The first notification effect is executed at the second timing different from the first timing when the setting suggestion is included. The game table to be played.

(Appendix 14)
・ The first notification effect is at least a game table that is related to big hits.

(Appendix 15)
-A game table that can identify that the setting suggestion is included in the first notification effect by different display modes of numbers.

(Appendix 16)
-A game table in which a first notification effect including a setting suggestion is executed at a second timing when a certain condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 17)
-A game table with a setting difference in the appearance rate when the first notification effect includes setting suggestions.

(Appendix 18)
・ A game table where re-lottery can be performed.

(Appendix 19)
-A game table that can display the number of drills (for example, display for each "5000" shot).

(Appendix 21)
・ A pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of multiple settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Equipped with a directing means that can execute a re-lottery effect ・ The game state after the jackpot may be the first game state・ The gaming state after the big hit may be the second gaming state. ・ The re-lottery effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second gaming state will be started as the gaming state after the big hit. A game table where setting suggestions may be made with a pattern.

It is possible to provide a game table with a characteristic as a directing means.

The distribution differs depending on the slow fluctuation of the re-lottery, the high-speed fluctuation, the frame advance fluctuation, the falling of the accessory, etc., and may function as a setting guess.

(Appendix 22)
-The decorative symbol variation display can be displayed.-If the symbol (confirmed symbol) derived by the re-lottery effect is the first decorative symbol, the first game state or the second game state starts after the jackpot game ends. If the confirmed symbol is the second decorative symbol (first case), the second game state is started after the jackpot game ends. In the first case, the second game state is started after the jackpot game ends. The first production is performed to suggest that is started (effects when promoted from "444" to "777" and "777" to "777").
-The first in the case of a re-lottery effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol (temporary symbol) and the confirmed symbol become the first decorative symbol (there are multiple types such as "222" → "444", "444" → "444"). There is a case where the effect is performed (the second case) ・ The re-lottery effect in the second case includes the setting suggestion (if it is not performed, the setting suggestion is not included).
Game table.

(Appendix 23)
-If the finalized symbol is the first decorative symbol, the promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game.-There are multiple types of the first decorative symbol (A and B), and the promotion effect is successful when A <B. Easy ・ When the temporary symbol is B and the final symbol is A, the re-lottery effect is a game table that includes setting suggestions.

In some cases, it is possible to have expectations for the change in the design itself.

(Appendix 24)
・ In the case of B → A, the first production is executed (it seems to be downgraded, but the promotion is left unattended due to the first production)
Game table.

In some cases, discomfort can be associated with game value.

(Appendix 25)
-In the case of A → A, the first effect may or may not be executed.-If the first effect is executed, the second game state is started after the jackpot game ends.-First If the effect of is not executed, the game table in which the first game state or the second game state is started after the jackpot game is completed.

(Appendix 26)
-The confirmed symbol may be related to the setting suggestion (confirmed symbol "444" where the first effect was performed → setting 4 or more confirmed, etc.)
Game table.

(Appendix 31)
-It is a simultaneous variable machine.-The attacker may open and close with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 1 change.-A game table that gives a pre-reading notice with a decorative symbol change display at least during the period related to the opening and closing operation of the attacker.

It is possible to provide a game table with a feature as a notice means.

(Appendix 32)
-A game table where the pre-reading notice starts after the fluctuation stop of Special Figure 2.

(Appendix 33)
-The fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (at least the small hit fluctuation) is longer than the longest fluctuation of Special Figure 1.-A game table where the pre-reading notice is started after the symbol is once derived as a decorative symbol.

Since it is difficult to grasp the content of the decorative symbol variation display executed in relation to the variation of the special figure 1 and determine the timing of the pre-reading notice, the player can start it after the decorative symbol is derived without disturbing the player. May be able to have expectations.

(Appendix 34)
-The look-ahead notice is a game table that is executed in connection with the hold of the special figure 1 that is held at the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that coincides with the timing when the opening / closing operation of the attacker by the small hit is started.

(Appendix 35)
-The look-ahead notice is a game table that does not include the notice regarding the change in Special Figure 1 during execution, and targets the next and subsequent changes.

(Appendix 36)
-During the opening / closing period of the attacker, the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 is interrupted (genuine special figure fluctuation), and only the decorative symbol fluctuation display changes.-A game table in which the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 resumes after the opening / closing period ends.

From the viewpoint of the special figure, the look-ahead notice may be executed for a certain period after being interrupted during the opening / closing period of the attacker and restarting.

(Appendix 37)
・ Special figure 2 After the start of fluctuation Special figure 2 Big hit notice at the start of change (correct)
-A game table that may straddle multiple special figure 1 fluctuations.

However, it may be possible to show it as a look-ahead notice.

It may be possible to encourage people to stop firing during a wasteful period when the big hit lottery is not held for a long period of time (if one is a big hit, the other is no lottery (confirmed loss)).

(Appendix 38)
-The above two irregular phenomena fluctuate mainly with special figure 1 as the leading role in normal times.-A game table that also displays decorative symbol fluctuations for special figure 1.

(Appendix 41)
-Equipped with a display means for additionally displaying the number of prize balls acquired during a state advantageous to the player (during the first game state: for example, during a small hit rush).-A hit game occurred during the first game state. In some cases, the number of prize balls may not be added and displayed in the attacker winning during the winning game, and the addition may be displayed collectively after the winning game is completed. ・ A certain condition is satisfied after one winning game is completed. A game table that does not display the addition when it is (for example, hold consecutive chan) and displays the addition collectively after the next winning game is completed.

It is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

It may be 3 or more consecutive chans.

Conditions other than the pending consecutive chan may be a probability change (including the next big hit confirmation etc.).

(Appendix 42)
-A certain condition is a reserved consecutive chan.-A game table that does not display addition but displays a suggested continuous chan.

(Appendix 43)
-A game table that starts to fluctuate while displaying the pending consecutive Chan suggestion.

In some cases, it may be possible to start the fluctuation during the pending ream suggestion so that the hit comes immediately.

(Appendix 44)
・ The hit includes big hit and small hit. ・ Decorative symbol variation display is possible. ・ The combination of big hit symbol and small hit symbol may stop at the same combination.

Certain symbols (eg, "333" or "777") may be excluded.

(Appendix 45)
・ The attacker is equipped with a decorative member on the front side of the opening / closing member. ・ The big hit includes the one with a long opening time, and the small hit is a game table with a short opening time and a large number of opening times.

Depending on the type of hit, it may be difficult to identify by opening the big hit or small hit attacker and combining the symbols.

(Appendix 46)
-There are a first display mode and a second display mode for the change of the decorative symbol in the first game state.-The size of the decorative symbol during the change is the first display mode> the second display mode. Changes related to hold after the end are performed in at least the second display mode (for example, changes for four hold or until the addition display ends).
-If the fluctuation is out of the period during which the fluctuation is performed in the second display mode, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a size corresponding to the second display mode, and if it is a hit, the stop display is performed in the first display mode. Amusement table to play.

In some cases, the out-of-order part of the pending ream can be made inconspicuous and the jackpot symbol can be displayed suddenly to make it look like a ream.

(Appendix 47)
-The period when the number display mode of the prize ball display is not additive display (the period when the pending consecutive Chan suggestion is executed) is different from the others (for example, mosaic, different colors, etc.)
Game table.

(Appendix 51)
-Minimum configuration of the simultaneous variable machine-A notice is displayed in connection with the interruption of the fluctuation time measurement of the special figure A due to the small hit of the special figure B-The content of the notice display is transmitted from the main at the start of the change of the special figure A A game table determined in connection with certain information to be played.

For example, in a gaming state in which special figure A is the main (for example, special figure height, normal figure height), special figure A starts to fluctuate during a small hit fluctuation of special figure B, and the symbol stop of the special figure A is a special figure. It is not before the B small hit symbol stop (Appendix 52)
-The sub is a game table that can specify whether one of the special figure A and the special figure B stops first or whether the special figure B makes a small hit by some information.

(Appendix 53)
・ There are multiple types of small hits (different types of fluffy / long / short)
-Some information includes the presence or absence of small hits and the type.-Sub is a game console that determines the content of the notice display according to the type of small hits in certain information.

There are different notice displays depending on the small hit type, and as a look-ahead notice, for example, the frequency at which red is displayed and the degree of expectation may be different.

(Appendix 54)
-The notice display is a game table based on the pre-reading notice regarding special figure A and the hold information at the start of change of special figure A.

(Appendix 55)
-The effect display starts according to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure A.-The game table in which the effect display proceeds without interruption even when the fluctuation time measurement of the special figure A is interrupted.

(Appendix 56)
-Ordinary variable display configuration (for example, the display of a certain combination of decorative symbols is a shaking display-> confirmed display)
-A game table in which the display of a certain combination of decorative symbols is swayed before the notice display is displayed.

(Appendix 57)
・ In the case of a miss, shake fluctuation → notice display → confirmed display (same / different from normal confirmed display) ・ In case of big hit, shake fluctuation → no notice → confirmed display (same / different from normal confirmed display) ..

It may be possible to prevent the misunderstanding that if the shaking continues even though it is out of the way, it may be a revival jackpot.

The content of the notice display may differ depending on whether there is a loss with SP reach or a loss.

In SP reach, which has a very high degree of expectation, the production stage may change after a shift (for example, the sorry zone).

Dohazure → Notice display 1 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off → Notice display 2 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off (when there is no small hit) → With stage change , SP reach 2 is off → notice display 2 → stage change may be performed.

(Appendix 58)
・ When a notice is displayed, the game console will always start after the end of the small hit in Special Figure B.

(Appendix 59)
-A game table where no notice is displayed if the fluctuation of special figure A starts during the small hit of special figure B.

(Appendix 60)
-A game table in which when the special figure A fluctuation starts during the special figure B small hit fluctuation, the new special figure B small hit fluctuation does not start during the special figure A fluctuation.

(Appendix 61)
・ Special figure B makes a small hit during the change of one special figure A ・ Even if you hit right after the small hit of special figure B, you can return to left-handed and do not notify. ・ During the change of one special figure A, right A game table that can be returned to left-handed when hit, and can be in three states: notify, not perform, and perform.

(Appendix 71)
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
When the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings with different jackpot probabilities is selected.
The game ball detecting means of one of the plurality of game ball detecting means is an out ball detecting means.
The out ball detecting means is a means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered the out port.
One of the plurality of effects is the first setting suggestion effect.
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect that at least suggests a selected setting among the plurality of settings.
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started.
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detecting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
Equipped with a control means capable of starting one of a plurality of gaming states
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started.
In the second gaming state, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console according to Appendix 71 or 72.
The execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
The game ball detecting means of one of the plurality of game ball detecting means is the first game ball detecting means.
The first game ball detecting means is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered a certain winning opening.
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is also satisfied in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detecting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 74.
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing.
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing.
The first timing and the second timing are different timings.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect.
In some cases, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect.
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period"), after the certain period has elapsed. Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is different from the first setting suggestion effect.
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of a certain effect.
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 71 to 78.
An achievement suggestion means for at least suggesting the achievement of the first effect execution condition is provided.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of performing multiple productions.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
When the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings with different jackpot probabilities is selected.
One of the plurality of effects is the first notification effect.
The first notification effect is an effect that includes at least notification about the game.
The first notification effect is an effect that may include suggestions for a selected setting among the plurality of settings.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game console described in Appendix 81.
The first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in an identifiable manner that the suggestion of the setting is included.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game console according to Appendix 81 or 82.
In the first case, the execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started,
In the first case, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started.
In the second case, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game console described in Appendix 83.
In the second case, the execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to Appendix 83 or 84.
In the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is started.
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 81 to 85.
The first notification effect is at least an effect related to a big hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 81 to 86.
In the first notification effect, the suggestion of the selected setting among the plurality of settings is performed depending on the display mode of the numbers.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 81 to 87.
The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is executed differs depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 81 to 88.
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect.
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which the result of the jackpot is once displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display is restarted, and then the jackpot result is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, after displaying the jackpot result (hereinafter referred to as "first jackpot result") suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state is used. There is also a case where the result of the jackpot notifying that the second advantageous state is advantageous is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the third case").
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is displayed once and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case").
In the re-lottery effect, the first notification effect may be executed.
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion of the setting.
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes the suggestion of the setting.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 81 to 88.
One of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won.
The display of the total number of prize balls won is at least a display of the total number of prize balls won in the big hit game.
The first notification effect is an effect executed in the effect of displaying the total number of prize balls won.
When the display of the total number of winning prize balls indicates that it is the first number, the execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started.
When the display of the total number of winning prize balls indicates that the number is the second number, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started.
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means that can display decorative pattern variation display,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
The fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, and
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The display means can display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of execution of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the first in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases where there are two states (hereinafter referred to as "the first case").
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 92)
The game console described in Appendix 91.
The certain period is a period started after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 93)
The game console according to Appendix 91 or 92.
It is equipped with a control means that can control one of a plurality of gaming states.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The result that at least the attacker changes state to the second state is displayed rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first gaming state. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display is longer.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The game console described in Appendix 93.
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 91 to 94.
In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is suspended when the attacker changes state to the second state, may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 91 to 95.
The first notice is not a notice regarding the running first symbol change display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 91 to 96.
In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends. The first symbol variation display resumes at
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 91 to 97.
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the second notice.
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed.
The second notice is a notice that the execution may be started when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game console described in Appendix 98.
The second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display that is executed a plurality of times.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 91 to 99.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
A control means that can control one of a plurality of gaming states,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is the total number of prize balls won.
The total number of winning prize balls is displayed by winning a prize in the attacker between the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the transition to the first gaming state. It is a display showing the total number of prize balls won.
In the second gaming state, when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, after the second state is completed, the game ball to the attacker The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
When a certain condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the first After the end of the second state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of winning prize balls displayed, and then the attacker enters the second state. After the second state is completed, the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of prize balls won in the attacker is added to the total number of prize balls displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game console described in Appendix 101.
The result of the game is the result of the symbol variation display.
The certain condition is that when the attacker shifts from the first state to the second state, the attacker is put into the second state as a result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. A condition that contains a result that will change state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game console described in Appendix 102.
If the certain condition is satisfied, at least the result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes state to the second state. A suggestion display (hereinafter referred to as "holding ream suggestion display") is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game console described in Appendix 103.
The pending ream suggestion display is a display in which the attacker is continuously displayed even after the second state is completed and the symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 101 to 104.
The second state is both a big hit game state and a small hit game state.
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variation display.
The result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the big hit game state may be the same as the result of the decorative symbol variation display that shifts to the small hit game state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game console described in Appendix 105.
A decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to see.
The operation mode of the attacker is different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game console according to Appendix 105 or 106.
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode.
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode.
The size of the decorative symbol in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol in the second display mode.
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is being held (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period"), which is held when the second state ends, the first display mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display is displayed, but if the certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the second display mode even during the certain period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 101 to 107.
Even when the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker is increased after the second state is completed. If the number of prize balls is not added to the total number of prize balls displayed, the attacker then becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state changes. After the end, the total number of winning prize balls is displayed in the period until the number of unadded prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of winning prize balls. To change the display mode of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 101 to 108.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
The fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, and
Display means that can display multiple displays and
A main control means capable of at least controlling the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means,
With a sub-control means that can at least control the display means,
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display being a small hit.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
The result of the second symbol variation display was the small hit in the period from the start of execution of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means. Depending on the situation, the attacker may be in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
In the first case, the period from when the result of the second symbol variation display becomes the small hit until the period when the attacker is in the second state elapses, the period of the first symbol variation display The progress of the fluctuation time is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as "a certain state").
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first notice display, and is
The first notice display may be displayed in connection with the situation.
The first notice display is a display displayed in one of a plurality of display modes.
The sub-control means is a means for performing control according to a command from the main control means.
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, the display mode of the first notice display is determined in relation to a certain command transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game console described in Appendix 111.
Which of the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display is stopped and displayed first by the certain command received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. Is a means that can identify
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game console according to Appendix 111 or 112.
The sub-control means is a means capable of specifying whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by the certain command.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 113.
There are a plurality of types of the small hits in which the mode of the second state is different.
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the small hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 114.
In the first case, the first notice display is a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol change display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started. Is,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 115.
One of the multiple displays is a decorative pattern variation display,
The display means can display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
Even in the above-mentioned certain state, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The game console described in Appendix 116.
The time from the start of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state to the start of displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display in a shaking variation, and the case where the certain state is not reached The time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to the start of displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display by the shaking variation is the same.
When the certain decorative symbol variation display starts in the certain state, after the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed by the shaking variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. The first notice display may be displayed during the period of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The game console according to Appendix 116 or 117.
If the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, the first notice display may be displayed,
When the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is the result of a big hit, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a shaking variation, and then the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, the first notice display may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 118.
When the first notice display is displayed, the display of the first notice display always starts after the certain state is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 119.
When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 121)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 111 to 120.
It is equipped with a control means that can control one of a plurality of gaming states.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The result that at least the attacker changes state to the second state is displayed rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first gaming state. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol variation display is longer.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
The game console described in Appendix 121.
Right-handed makes it easier to win a game ball to the attacker.
In the first gaming state, when the second symbol variation display becomes the small hit and the attacker becomes the second state, a certain period after the end of the second state. Then, do not display the display prompting the player to hit left,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 131)
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of performing multiple productions.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
When the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the settings with different jackpot probabilities is selected.
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect.
After the jackpot game is over, it may shift to the first game state,
After the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the second game state,
The second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The re-lottery effect is an effect that may at least suggest that the state shifts to the second game state after the end of the jackpot game.
In the re-lottery effect, suggestions regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be included.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means.

(Appendix 132)
The game console described in Appendix 131.
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which the result of the jackpot is once displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display is restarted, and then the jackpot result is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, after once displaying the jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as "first jackpot result") suggesting that the first gaming state may be reached, the second gaming state is displayed. There is a case where the result of the big hit that informs that is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the third case"),
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is displayed once and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case").
In the fourth case, the game may shift to the first game state after the jackpot game is completed.
In the fourth case, the state may shift to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.
In the third case, after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the second game state.
In the third case, the first production is performed,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be performed.
The first effect performed in the third case is an effect suggesting that the state shifts to the second game state after the end of the big hit game.
The first effect performed in the fourth case is an effect including suggestions regarding a selected setting among the plurality of settings.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 133)
The game console described in Appendix 132.
In the fourth case, in the jackpot game, a promotion effect may be performed as to whether or not to shift to the second gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.
As a result of the first jackpot, the combination of the first decorative symbols may be displayed.
As a result of the first jackpot, a combination of the second decorative symbols may be displayed.
The combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol are combinations of different decorative symbols.
In the fourth case, when the combination of the second decorative symbols is displayed after being displayed once with the combination of the first decorative symbols, the second game after the end of the jackpot game in the promotion effect. It is easy to be notified that the state will change,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after being displayed once with the combination of the second decorative symbols, the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings is given. included,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations that the combination of jackpot symbols will change.

(Appendix 134)
The game console described in Appendix 133.
In the fourth case, the first effect is performed when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after the combination of the second decorative symbols is displayed once.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to associate a sense of discomfort with the game value.

(Appendix 135)
The game console according to Appendix 133 or 134.
In the fourth case, there is a case where the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after being displayed once with the combination of the first decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "the fifth case").
In the fifth case, the first effect may be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "sixth case").
In the fifth case, the first effect may not be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "seventh case").

In the sixth case, after the jackpot game is completed, the second game state is entered.
In the seventh case, the state may shift to the first gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.
In the seventh case, the game state of the valley may be entered after the jackpot game is completed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 136)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 133 to 135.
In the fourth case, the combination of the decorative symbols finally confirmed may be a suggestion regarding the setting.
A game table characterized by that.

FIG. 39 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 39, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous hit operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous hit function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 39 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is paid out. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary barrel game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 40 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 40), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the insertion means that both are included. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided at the lower part of the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 41A, "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 2010. " It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 Ordinary symbol display device 212 1st special symbol display device 214 2nd special symbol display device 226a General winning opening 230 1st special symbol start port (top)
231 First special figure start port (bottom)
232 2nd special figure Start port 234a 1st variable winning port 235a 2nd variable winning port 240 Out port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory SWout Out sphere detection sensor

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means that can display decorative pattern variation display,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
The fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, and
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the second symbol according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases where it becomes a state (hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
In the case of the first, there Ri case before Symbol Ru first notice is performed Tei with the attacker has the second state,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed with the attacker in the first state.
It is characterized by that.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
Attackers that can win game balls [for example, first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a, etc.]
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the normal gaming state, the first special feature. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display in accordance with the symbol variation display on the diagram display device 212],
The attacker can change its state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, the "special figure g" is A small hit game is executed in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes up to 12 times when the stop display is displayed and a small hit occurs],
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the second symbol according to the result of the second symbol variation display. In the case of a state (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the second case is between the start of the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 and the stop display. When the special figure display device 214 becomes a small hit at "special figure g" and the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes in a small hit game state, etc.] ".
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 34 (j)].
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (j), the pre-reading notice effect is "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration". 1 ”is performed during shaking fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts],
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in the second state of the attacker [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a small hit is obtained in the special figure 2. In some cases, the second variable winning opening 235a is being opened and closed, and a look-ahead notice effect is being performed.],
In the first case, the first notice may be executed with the attacker in the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (f) to (j), a special figure. After the small hit game related to the small hit in 2 is completed, the pre-reading notice effect may start after a while],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.
In addition, "The first notice is a notice that starts after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a pre-reading notice with a delay". The production will start at a timing later than the timing when the small hit symbol such as "Special Figure g" is displayed in Special Figure 2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "a control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300]] is provided.
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state is the first variation time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.].
The variation time of the second symbol variation display, which displays the result that at least the attacker changes state to the second state in the first gaming state, is the second variation time [for example, 580 seconds. Etc.]
The second fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the normal gaming state, the decoration symbol variation display is displayed. Corresponding to the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol, etc.],
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 35A, in the normal gaming state, the second special feature Corresponding to the symbol variation display in the diagram display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation display of the decorative symbol, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is held when the attacker changes state to the second state, may be executed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (j), the pre-reading advance notice effect is suspended when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Pre-reading notice production, etc. for the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "The first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol variation display being executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (j), the pre-reading notice effect is It is not a notice production regarding the symbol variation display of special figure 1 that was interrupted due to a small hit in special figure 2],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the period is After the end, the first symbol variation display resumes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (f) to (h), a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 and a small hit game related to the small hit. During the period in which is being executed, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed when the small hit game ends. Resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the notice of one of the plurality of notices is the second notice [for example, the big hit notice of special figure 2 in which the characters" Preparing for big hit !! "shown in FIG. 35 (d) are displayed]. And
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed.
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display that results in a big hit [for example, FIG. 35]. As shown in FIGS. (A) to (d), when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display which is a big hit on the second special symbol display device 214, The big hit notice of Special Figure 2 with the characters "Preparing for big hit !!" will start],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the period during which the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is executed and the period during which the first notice is executed overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (j), decoration. Pre-reading notice is being produced while the design is shaking],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Claims (10)

The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means that can display decorative pattern variation display,
An attacker who can win a game ball,
The fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol variation display, and
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
The attacker can change state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display.
The second state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state.
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, the attacker is the second symbol according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases where it becomes a state (hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period").
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The certain period is a period started after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
It is equipped with a control means that can control one of a plurality of gaming states.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state is the first variation time.
The variation time of the second symbol variation display displaying the result that at least the attacker changes state to the second state in the first gaming state is the second variation time.
The second fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation time.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 3.
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is suspended when the attacker changes state to the second state, may be executed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The first notice is not a notice regarding the running first symbol change display,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends. The first symbol variation display resumes at
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
The notice of one of the plurality of notices is the second notice.
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed.
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display that results in a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 8.
The second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display that is executed a plurality of times.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.